Skip to main content

Full text of "The Mill and Lumberman's Success: A Treatise on the Care of All Kinds of Saws"

See other formats


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http : //books . google . com/| 



The Mill Bnd LnmtiBitinaD'^ ^ncce^^. 

A TREATISE 



Li' 



HOW TO BE A SUCCESSFUL SAW AND PLANER 
MAN, MILL BUILDING, ETC. 



D THE SAWING OF VAU'ABl.K TIMBI 
O ADVANTAGE- STACKING AND HOW TO TAKK 
CARE OP LUMBHK. 



LIGHTNING LUMBER CALCi 
OTHER RULES. CARE C 



Copyrighted 1890 by 

J. H. MINER, 
All rights reserved. 



In entering this, my second edition on saws, 
I shall not only treat more fully on hammering, 
but on the care and management of all kinds of 
saws. This contains no history of saws, but the 
saw of to-day just as every user wants. Practical 
millmen know that a saw fitted up for a certain 
kind of wood, feed and speed will by no means 
run at a Tnce versa from this. 

In this work I shall show by illustrations, saws 
adapted for every purpose. How to hammer, 
grind and sharpen for hard, soft and frozen timber. 

There is acknowledged to be a less standard 
among millmen than any other business. Most 
everyone has his peculiar way. This is true, es- 
pecially with filers, and not one out of ten can take 
right hold of a mill of a double or triple capac- 
ity and go right ahead, simply because he is 
clinging to the style of tooth condition of saw 
that suited A's mill while B*s mill wants an en- 
tirely diflFerent tooth, etc. I shall illustrate this 
fully, and arranged in parts so that the reader may 
readily apply his case. One-half of our present 



mills would cut 25 per cent, more and better lum- 
ber if their saw was in proper order. This is say- 
ing nothing about the condition of machinery, &c. 
This work will put a man right there, and will 
prove of inestimable value to all who thoroughly 
apply it. 

My treatment on band saws will be found to 
comprise all there is toward making a perfect saw, 
treating fully on proper shaped teeth, how to 
hammer fully, and the general care of such saws. 
This is from the very best authority and builders 
in the United States, and can be wholly relied 
on. This work will be of interest to saw and 
planing mill builders, treating on the most con- 
venient plans illustrated, how to care for planers 
and wood-working machinery, together with 
valuable rules and suggestions about sawing choice 
lumber, lightning calculations not found in any 
other publication. Shingle saws are treated fully. 
My instructions on same will save a man hundreds 
of dollars annually. These will be proven as 
facts by simply following instructions. 

J. H. Miner. 



SPECIAL NOTICE. 

This work is compiled with the view of applying 
itself readily to all millmen and lumbermen, rang- 
ing from the amateur beginner to the expert. This 
work is arranged in parts, one to three, in ham- 
mering, filing and gumming, so that the reader 
can readily apply himself. There are many works 
out, not from a practical basis, that are of no value. 
All that is asked is a careful study and application. 



6 



HAMMERING CIRCULAR SAWS. 



FOR BEGINNERS, SHOWING HOW TO STRAIGHTEN 

SAWS. 



Part I. 

This first lesson I shall confine myself to such 
treatment as is best adapted to beginners, and as 
he advances, the nearer the perfect saw will be 
reached. The first requisite is tools. No man 
can do anything without tools. A good workman 
with poor tools can scarcely accomplish anything. 

The accompanying engraving represents a 
cheap, handy sawbench which ought to be in every 
mill. While it is not all that might be desired as 
a man advances, it is certainly what is necessary 
for a beginner. The tools shown in cut are worth 
about $10.00. The anvil A is set on an end of a 
12x12 block, with a mortise to receive pin Z?, 
which has a shoulder and reduced to 2", just the 
size of hole in your saw. This pin is cut at a 
slant directly at Z?, which allows the operator to 
tilt or cant the saw in a horizontal position on an- 



vil for hammering. E shows a key for tightening 
saw H. B shows support for saw level with face of 




anvil. A" shows an L attached to the anvil post at 
right angle. C shows a screw which is run behind 
the anvil. This screw is foi a support by which 
a dished saw may be sprung straight before apply- 
ing the straightedge. This is necessary, as any 
saw dished if but a little, forms a part of sphere 
and is full or high under the straightedge where- 
ever it is applied. Now, it is very evident that the 
saw is not sprung all over as it appears, although 
four-fifths of the hammerers of to-day will begin on 
such a saw by pounding all over or on straight seg- 
ment lines from center to rim, all of which makes a 
saw worse. By adding up all the good men, a fair 



8 

conception can be drawn from the number that is 
left. The first thing is to get the saw in as near a 
straight position as possible, then apply the 
straightedge and it will tell the truth. As I will 
treat briefly arid very plainly here, a beginner can 
easily understand. 

All saws that require hammering badly are 
generally dished from the log, often caused by 
blue spots or "bull's eyes.'' These places are 
caused by excessive heat, and in one term are a 
blister. If the stain of the blue yet remains on 
saw, it can be located, and will show a very high 
place on the log side. Hang saw on bench full 
side out and set out screw C to saw. Then with 
the left hand spring saw until it appears straight, 
then apply say 20" straightedge in perpendicular 
position with right hand, letting it extend down 
to collar. I will add here that key E may put in 
a horizontal position, instead as in cut. This will 
allow straightedge to come down below the bearing 
of the collars and will plainly show defects. A 
good, open light (North or East) is best, with no 
dark object in front of you. Mark with a piece of 
chalk or hard bar soap all the highest places, 
holding the straightedge perpendicular. After 
going around the saw, take the straightedge and 
apply it at right angles on all the marks you have 
made, that is, directly across the former way. Now 



9 

if in this position you find any places that do not 
show a lump, rub out the cross mark and make a 
long mark in the direction of the straightest way 
of the saw. This shows a twisted place, that is, 
sprung more one way than the other. . Now take 
the straightedge and apply it on the rim in a hor- 
izontal position (level) as close as possible. In 
this position you will find several high places, 
showing to be higher directly on the extreme 




^^. / 



edge; for such places two or three straight parallel 
marks are made, as shown at C, Fig. i, the 



10 

marks gradually diminishing at from 4" to 
from the rim, as to the height of the twist. I 
I shows about how the saw will appear after be 
carefully tested with the straightedge. A series 
marks are shown just outside of the collar. T 
is where the saw was sprung from being dish 
All dished saws are sprung near the collar, unl 
they have one or more blue spots as shown at 
Fig. 2. 




Fin 2. 

It will be necessary here to say a little m 
about a dished saw. If a saw is dished and she 



11 

one or two blue spots in testing, often the removal 
of such places will practically straighten the saw. 
Fig. 2 shows the appearance of a dished saw. Fig. 
3 shows the saw standing erect with straightedge 
applied. At B it shows considerable high places; 
in fact, the straightedge will show a high place in 
any position. E shows the saw leaned as stated 
until it appears straight to the sighting of the eye, 
(this is accomplished with screw C on the bench). 
The straightedge shows a low place at C where it 
formerly showed a very high place, E shows it 




Fig. 3. 



sprung just outside of the collars, the marks in 
Fig. I showing how it is laid off for straightening. 
A shows considerable of a lump. This is a blue spot. 



12 

Often the removal of such places where there are 
three of them, as in Fig. 3, will bring a dished 
saw, as stated, nearly straight. So it is plainly 
seen the necessityof getting the saw in the proper 
position before applying the straightedge. (Many a 
man has failed right here.) 

The saw Fig. i is laid on the leather pad or 
piece of pasteboard applied on the face of the anvil, 
and may be secured by flaps extending down on 
each side with a band over them ; this keeps it in 
place. Now with a helper strike a blow on each 
mark with the round peine, raising the hammer, 
say 18" high, using a little exertion. If a thick 
saw, a little heavier blow; if a thin one, the 
weight of the hammer will almost do. Use the 
long peine on the long marks and never across 
them ; places that are very high require often two 
or a half dozen blows, as the case of a blue spot. 
After you have worked all the marks, stand the saw 
on edge, bring it to a poise, and notice if it appears 
yet full on this side. If so, hang it back on the 
bench in the same position and examine the places 
that showed to be the highest. They may appear 
almost as high as ever, while the remainder of 
the spots may be fairly level. Lay saw on pad 
again and apply the same number of blows on 
such places. Saw may now set a little the other 
way, that is, dish a little to you. If so, this is all 



13 

right, as you will find high places on the other 
side to bring it back. Reverse saw, but don't rub 
out the marks. After marking all the high places 
you find on this side, notice if any of the marks 
correspond with those that you have just worked 
on, if so, you have hit too heavy a blow. This is 
the best way to govern the weight of your blows. 
Nine-tenths of the saw hammerers strike too heavy, 
• which eventually ruins a saw. Continue on both 
sides of the saw, being careful to bring all the 
twisted parts on the rim down level. If saw is 
dished and is high outside of collar, as shown in 
Fig. 2, E^ don't strike too heavy ; have the saw as 
solid on pad as possible and strike several blows 
in one place and much lighter; the reason of this is, 
some men have no judgment about pounding, 
and too much rebound — not solid — blows are liable 
to produce fracture, especially in a saw that has 
been badly dished several times. Some saws are 
made harder in center, hence the caution to pre- 
vent fracture. Treat the saw, say twice on each 
side, leaving it leaning a trifle to the log when 
standing erect on its edge or free on bench. Your 
saw may not screw up true on the mandrel. If 
not, it will invariably dish from the log, which in- 
dicates that saw or collar is wrong. Take the saw 
oflf and examine if you can't find a few small lumps 
near the collar, as shown in Fig. i, and at E^ Fig. 2 ; 



14 

if so, remove them on the pad, noticing carefully 
if they are a round or a long place. This you can 
easily locate with the 12" straightedge applied at 
right angles. Such places invariably run from 
center to rim and from rim to center, as shown by 
the long marks in Fig. i. After removing such 
places saw may dish too much toward the log; turn 
it around and examine between center and rim 
and you can easily find two or three high places, 
remove them, then your saw should screw up 
right; if not, it is in the collar, which you can either 
paper or turn oflF true, as treated further on. Your 
saw may now be much truer but not running much 
better. If it heats easily on the rim and has to be 
run warm in the center, that is, out of the log, it 
requires tensioning, which is fully treated in Part 
II. It is sometimes necessary to tension a saw 
the first thing. It is no common thing to find 
saws too long on the rim, the rim being slack, 
caused by heating and gumming. Now, if before 
you attempt the treatment I have just given, your 
saw should appear winding or twisting on the 
rim to your eye, it is a sure indication of needing 
tension. Again, a saw will often appear weak and 
loose on the rim, the rim quivering easily while 
the center does not, and by standing saw on edge 
and giving it a light shake, the rim will quiver and 
center remain very near still; again, pull the center 



15 

toward you if it don't spring much at the center, 
and the rim bag back and forth, often springing 
the opposite way, is a sure indication. Again, if 
a saw appears a little winding and changes its 
position when rolled on its edge occasionally, a 
kind of jerk or quiver is noticed, which is another 
indication. If a doubtful case, and saw don't 
straighten easily, but seems very firm and all at 
once changes its position all over is a sure indi- 
cation. Be careful to study this thoroughly. It is 
the best plan to open the saw on the anvil as 
treated in Part II. Saws that require tensioning 
are often run so long that they will assume a com- 
plete wind. Such a saw will require to be heated 
up in center by friction, or spoil one or two logs 
in getting saw straight, as sawyers call it, saying 
then, saw was all right. 

Continuous use will put the best saw ever 
made in this shape, no matter how careful the 
sawyer is. Some cases have been two years with 
thick saws while others will not run two months 
on a small mill. This diflFerence I will treat 
further on. Often a dished saw, after being 
straightened, will appear flimsy on the rim and 
discourage the operator. Remember that the 
center of saw must appear and be a little looser 
than the rim. 



16 



TENSIONING CIRCVhAR SAWS. 



Part II. 

Tensioning saws is that part of treatment that 
necessitates stretching the metal. This is done 
on the anvil. The condition of all circular saws 
is that the metal must be equally strained or 
stretched. All saws naturally get slack on the rim 
that is longer, the metal expanding from heat gum- 
ming and the action of centrifugal force as stated. 
In all such cases the metal nearer the center must 
be stretched, which makes it as large as the rim, 
to use a common term. Often the center must be 
much larger than the rim, so that the saw dishes 
or sags back and forth at the center. This is in the 
case of high speeded saws. 

Fig. 3 shows how to lay oflF such a saw, which 
was described in the clause of Part I. This cut 
shows five lines drawn, which is done by striking 
circles while saw is centered on the bench. A saw 
will often require but three or four lines. Now take 
the saw to the anvil, begin at the line nearest the 
center and apply blows about 2" apart directly on 
the line, having saw bedded very firm on anvil, 
so that the blow will be solid. The best plan in 
changing positions of saw is to tap the saw lightly 



17 



before applying the blow. If your saw is very 
stiff it may require hammering on four lines, then 
turn the saw around. Now, if 'your saw is not 
rusty you can see a dull spot where each blow 




A STIFF SAW. 

was applied. Strike a blow directly on each spot, 
the same blows on this side but not quite as heavy. 
When operating on such a saw, it will often appear 
as though it was getting worse, that is, where a 
saw is so badly stretched on the rim as to form a 
twist and appear firmer, not so limber, and when 
passing from this stiff, twisted state it appears 
quite limber and flimsy on the rim, but a contin- 



18 

nation of the blows soon removes this. The case 
is often such before stretching the saw, that is, 
where saws are 'just slack enough to not quite 
twist and yet are sensitive and limber on the rim. 
This kind of a saw is not as slack as the one just 
described. I deem this explanation necessary, as 
I have had saws myself that almost seemed to be 
taking a backset, but soon came up. In this 
treatment, Part II, I will not go into as much 
detail about speed. If your saw is stiff and you 
open it until it shows to spring a little with the 
hand it will run 50 per cent, better than before. 
After opening up the saw until the center is a 
trifle the limberest, you can level up (straighten) 
as described in Part I, on block or pad. 

Fig. 4 shows a dished saw. This may be de- 
scribed in two ways. A saw too open for its speed 
will dish back and forth the same both ways. 
Another form of dished saw is a new saw ordered 
hammered for too high a speed. Saw may not 
dish when screwed upon the mandrel, but a few 
days run discloses the fact that the saw leans 
from the log — is full on the log side. A description 
of the latter is this: It will lean but one way. 
Often if the saw is leaned to an angle of 45° the 
center will drop through the other way. The 
marks near the center of Fig. 4 at ^ show where 
it is sprung, which is just outside of the collars, as 



19 



shown in Fig. 2 at Ey but not quite so close to the 
collar, that is, not an abrupt place. It will show 
light lumps often 6" from the collar. Straighten 




Flff. 4.-A DISHED SAW. 

this place on the pad and where saw is brought 
true strike a line at A and go to the anvil and 
stretch this part, striking very light with blows 
about 4" apart. It is a very easy matter to do too 
much of this, as the rim is many times larger than 
the center. In all cases of tensioning as described 
so far, is done regardless of lumps with the round 
peine of the hammer. It is not always necessary 



20 

to stiffen a dished saw after straightening up. The 
description just given is on a new saw too open and 
dished, with but little use. Line A is to be ap- 
plied to a saw that heats in the center and sags 
back and forth equally both ways, runs in and out 
of the cut, mostly out. Again, a saw that is dished 
and does not require stiflFening, as line A^ is invar- 
iably much harder to get back to its place, while 
a saw that is too open in the center often requires 
only a few light blows. This is the case with high 
speeded saws, it taking but very little to change 
them back and forth; but a stiflF saw requires much 
more work. 

It is hardly necessary to describe the many 
fogy ways that there are for treating a saw. Will 
say that many men attempt to hammer saws 
directly to the reverse. My system has met with 
such unprecedented success that I deem it not 
necessary to enter into a volume on the many fogy 
ways of hammering. 



TENSIONING CIRCULAR SAWS TO SPEED 
FOR THE AVERAGE MILL. 

It is an impossibility to adopt a speed suitable 
for all the variety of speeds at which saws are 
run. I will give an approximate of the speed of 
saws, which can be relied on with safety. This 



21 

approximation is as near as can be estimated. No 
sawmaker has ever discovered any exact tension 
for saws at a certain speed. I will estimate from 
the standard speed of saws, which table is given 
in this book. Saws for portable and light or 
limited power do not require to be as open as 
ample power at the same speed. For such mills 
a lo gauge 48" saw may have the center to spring 
just a trifle more than the center is ; if two gauges 
heavier, it must be stiffer; the same with a heavier 
gauge. A 52" may spring a little by pulling back 
and forth with the hand ; heavier gauge may be 
nearly stiff; 56" may sag a little heavier, gauge not 
so much; 60" must just stand straight; 64" must 
dish a little back and forth if power is good and 
speed nearly up to the standard speed. High 
tempered saws may not be quite so open. If 
mandrel runs hot they require less tension. In 
Part III this will be treated fully for higher speeds. 
Fig. 5 shows how to distribute the tension 
properly, that is, to have the tension properly 
located. Without the knowledge of this no man 
can master the saw. Lines i, 2 and 3 show 
equally one-third of the saw from the radius. That 
part marked 3 which is half way between center 
and rim must be more open than any other part, 
gradually diminishing as lines i and 2 are passed. 
To illustrate a 60" saw, 30" to center for opening 



22 

saw, hammering should be done no closer than 
lo" from the rim and lo" from the center, the re- 
maining lo", which is 3, is to be hammered on. 
This is with a saw with tension first property dis- 
tributed. It is often that a saw is too tight on 




Fiff. 5. -HOW TO DISTRIBUTE THE TENSION. 

line 2 and too open on line i. This is done by 
hammering too near the center, and results in the 
meanest running saw under the sun. Again, I 
have seen line i too tight and line 2 too open ; this 
does not make as bad a running saw but is danger- 
ous of fracture treated further on. 



23 




Fi«. 6.-8HOW8 A TWISTED SAW. 

This saw has been partly treated, and will be 
again treated in **unequal tension.'* Such saws 
often bother good men and are very annoying. 
The first thing to look into in such a saw is the 
condition of its tension. As previously stated, if a 
saw is long on the rim it will twist. This must 
be guarded against. Saws are often jammed and 
badly twisted, the strain coming against the blade 
in a side-like way as when a saw runs out of the 
log or badly jammed. Fig. 6 shows such a saw. 
This saw is twisted at the rim and collars ; by 
turning it around it will appear nearly or quite 



24 

Straight but when turned half around will show 
very full. Such a saw is tested on the rim and 
at center. C and D show two very high places 
on the rim, with the straightedge applied in a hor- 
izontal position ; but when turned at right angles 
saw will show straight and often light under it. 
A 30" straightedge is best to use in the perpen- 
dicular position so as to reach close to the collar. 
By tracing C and D the twist will be seen often 
to run clear to the center, diminishing there. 
In such cases it is not necessary' to straighten -or 
hammer clear down to the center, begin at the 
rim and you will find that one-third, or sometimes 
one-fourth, of the way down will be necessary, 
such places are sprung most directly on the edge 
and require nearly all the straightening done on 
the extreme edge with saw bedded firm on the 
padded anvil. A and B show to be at right angles 
to C and D, Very often such a saw will appear 
full on one side, and at right angles full on the 
other side. It is often necessary to go right down 
to the eye of the saw. Such places are removed 
with the long peine, always applying it on a line 
with the straightest way of the saw. Sometimes 
from the fogy way of hammering a saw in seg- 
ments, causes it to spring on its quarters, appear- 
ing as though it was slack on the rim ; when such 
a saw won't yield to the opening in Fig. 3 it may 



25 



be considered a hard case and is fully treated in 
"unequal tension.'' 




Fis. 7.-CHANGING A SAW FROM RIGHT TO LEFT 

HAND. 

This can easily be done with any saw. The 
idea among millmen that this cannot be done is 
erroneous. Fig. 7 shows how this can be done. 
If saw is of one gauge taper about four blows on 
line B will change it, striking on such lumps as 
can be found, but little will change a saw. A 
shows that a saw two gauges thicker at center 
must be set back closer to the center. This is 
done on the board side in changing a saw from 



26 



right to left hand. What is wanted is a saw per- 
fectly flat on the log side or a little to the log. 
Many saws will run the vice versa without ham- 
mering. 



HIGH SPBBDBD FAST FJEBD SA WS. 



Part III. 



High speeded saws require close and constant 
attention. On the average mill a saw can be 
hammered and will run for weeks and months 
without re-hammering, while the high speeded 
saw requires constant care, a little hammering every 
day or so, and to accomplish this I have con- 
structed a patent filing and hammering bench, by 
which the operator can hammer his saw at will. 
The special feature of this bench is in the pro- 
vision of a tension gauge by which the unequal 
tension of a high speeded saw can be accurately 
attained. 




IMPROVED TENSIONING BENCH. 

This illustrates my liaiiiiiieriug bench suitable 
fcr accurately correcting unequal tension in saws. 

is also a good filing and jointing bench and 
hould be in every mill. The screws shown in 
[Qt are for springing the saw in a dished form for 
festing unequal tension, the only correct way. 
saw is centered on collar and mandrel A 
(bown in place at B, When saw is centered and 
fct out by screws, no pull of the hand or guess 
'■work is relied upon, which is the only known 
method. The saw can be revolved and the least 
variatioa of light under tlie straightedge cai; 



28 

readily be detected, which closely locates unequal 
tension, as treated on. No saw can be accurately 
tested with the straightedge without first being 
sprung straight. If leaned on the floor its posi- 
tion has to be continually changed, which will de- 
ceive. This bench can be built in mill. Tools as 
shown in cut cost about $15.00. Anvil weighs 
loolbs. and is suitable for both band and circular 
hammering. Size of face 5x8 inches, 7^ inches 
high. These tools are first-class in every respect. 
The speed of saws given in this table is the 
standard, but many saws are run much above 



TABLE OF SPEED OF CIRCULAR SAWS. 



vSIZK OF SAW. 


RKV. PER MIN. 


SIZK OF SAW. 


RKV. PER MIN. 


8 inches. 


4,500 


42 inches. 


870 


10 inches. 


3,600 


44 inches. 


840 


12 inches. 


3,000 


46 inches. 


800 


14 inches. 


2,585 


48 inches. 


750 


16 inches. 


2,222 


50 inches. 


725 


18 inches. 


2,000 


52 inches. 


700 


20 inches. 


1,800 


54 inches. 


675 


22 inches. 


1.636 


56 inches. 


650 


24 inches. 


1,500 


58 inches. 


625 


26 inches. 


1,384 


60 inches. 


600 


28 inches. 


1.285 


62 inches. 


575 


30 inches. 


1,200 


64 inches. 


550 


32 inches. 


1,120 


66 inches. 


/ 545 


34 inches. 


1,050 


68 inches. 


529 


36 inches. 


1,000 


70 inches. 


514 


38 inches. 


950 


72 inches. 


500 


40 inches. 


900 







this. This table gives a little over 9,000 feet rim 
speed, while many saws are run as high as 14,000 
feet rim speed. Saws running at the above speed 
with ample power should be open, as follows : 50" 



29 

saw slightly open, center sagging both ways when 
saw is leaned; 56" will dish a trifle; 60" will go 
through with a jerk ; 64" will require considerable 
pull, center going through with a '*thug." If 
power is limited saws must not be so open. Saws 
running as high as 12,000 feet speed, and above, 
will require 3olbs. pull to set a 60" saw back and 
forth. Experience will better demonstrate this. 
There are so many conditions that no accurate rule 
can be had. With my bench the dish of the saw 
can be registered, thus the same saw can be kept 
exactly to its speed. Saws one gauge thicker in 
center do not require quite so much opening, 
neither does a saw with few teeth. Inserted teeth 
saws do not require as much opening as the solid 
at the same speed. 



HAMMERING SAWS, TENSIONING AND 
CORRECTING UNEQUAL TENSION. 

This may be termed the chief element in fitting 
up thg perfect saw. It is first necessary to go into 
a detailed explanation of what unequal tension is 
and how saws are affected by tension in service. 
Tension in a saw may be more commonly illus- 
trated as temper in a cutting tool. Tension in 
saws does not apply to temper, but to the condi- 



30 

tion under which the saw has to work. A saw at 
a high speed is subject to an enormous amount of 
centrifugal strain on the rim, which expands that 
part ; and unless the center is stretched to compen- 
sate this strain the saw cannot be run success- 
fully. A low speeded saw is not affected as much 
as the higher and does not require as much ten- 
sion. In tensioning a saw as treated, is done by 
stretching the steel. The great secret of this is 
not in a uniformity of blows, as many think, but is 
in having the saw of an equal opening at any one 
corresponding point throughout the plate ; that is, 
on a line of the circumference. The tension should 
be precisely the same, and as the rim and center 
is approached should diminish as hereinafter ex- 
plained, gradually diminishing at that point where 
action of centrifugal force ceases, which will be 
fully explained by cuts. 

The center of all saws should be stiff, ranging 
from 6 to lo inches from the eye, according to size 
and condition. The great secret conies in locating 
unequal tension, that is, parts of the saw more 
open or tighter than others, which is involyed in 
unequal temper. It is a very common thing to 
see saws opened to appear to proper speed (and 
in reality are) and the saw won't run. Such a saw 
may be one side open for a speed loo revolutions 
* '^^her than its speed, while the opposite side may 



31 

have lOO revolutions lower speed than what the 
saw was to run at, and yet this can't be detected in 
the ordinary way by standing a saw on its edge, 
the dish in a high speeded saw being too much for 
guesswork. Now it will be readily understood 
why such a saw can't make good lumber and hardly 
cut a straight board, one side of the saw too large 
the other side too small. ** A saw divided against 
itself can't run." The large side that is open for 
lOO higher than speed tends to dish, while the other 
side tends to snake a reverse action on the rim. 
Imagine this action on a saw running at a speed of 
900 per minute. Could it hardly be expected that 
such a saw would stay in the guide pins ? This 
saw appeared perfect to the average man. What 
gets a saw in that condition ? There are a dozen 
reasons why a new saw, perfect, will soon get in 
this shape, that is, with a tight side, among most 
of the saw hammerers of to-day, by the prevailing 
plan to always hammer a saw on the ^nvil for all 
kinds of defects. Lumps or sprung places on the 
rim never appear at any regular intervals or dis- 
tances apart, but on the contrary, and show lumps 
to be miscellaneous. Now, this miscellaneous 
hammering brings about unequal tension ; not so 
much the first hammering, but two or three such 
hammerings bring about much unequal tension, 
simply because lumps are not always unequal ten- 



32 

sion, and where a place is ** belted'' a series of blows, 
it invariably turns out to be an unequal spot in 
high speeded saws. If a man thoroughly under- 
stands tension he can correct this ; but I have not 
seen one man in twenty-five that hammered this 
way that had a perfect running saw. Uniform 
hammering is by no means advisable to a thorough 
saw man, and yet it is the only safe way for begin- 
ners. Hammering on the anvil for all defects I do 
not advise. It is best to level up the saw on the 
pad ; this puts it in a condition for determining the 
unequal tension, otherwise it is difficult to test. All 
practical hammerers know that strains or defects 
near the rim of a saw are most prominent direct on 
the edge of saw. Now, the hammering of the ex- 
treme edge of a saw with the cross peine on anvil 
will curl that part up and make it worse. A lesson 
on saws may be taken from the tin and coppersmith. 
Note how particular he is to remove lumps with 
his wooden mallet. Why ? Because to stretch the 
metal with hammer and anvil would get it in such 
a shape by stretching it that he could 'never 
straighten it. Precisely the same with the saw, 
the saw being more dense only yields in the course 
of frequent treatment. Saws are not sent out 
needing hammer tension, as some are ready to 
advocate. Hammering on the anvil, as the majority 
of men do, tends to crystallize the plate, which by no 



33 

means is argument for any improvement. A saw 
should -be hammered the quickest way and 
accomplish good results. Saw hammering is 
fatiguing and worrying, and when a man takes hold 
of a saw and there is just enough to do to it to en- 
courage him, it is much better than a half day's work 
and then not be certain whether it is any better or 
not. In testing a saw for unequal tension it should 
be hung on the bench, jam nuts set up so as to just 
leave free movement to saw. Now screws D D 
are set out until saw dishes considerably ; revolve 
saw and note the variation of saw under straight- 
edge, marking the closest places and those that 
stand off the farthest; take saw off and turn it around, 
not disturbing screws D D \i avoidable. Mark all 
the variations as before. You will notice that some 
of the marks correspond ; if so, it is an indication of 
unequal tension. That part that stood off the 
farthest on both sides from the straightedge is a 
loose place ; the place that stood the closest on both 
sides was a tight place. Note the variation and 
location of such places, not going closer to the rim 
than one-third of the distance from rim to center 
and about the same distance toward the center. Fig. 
I shows how to remove such places, B showing the 
loose place that stood the farthest from the gauge 
on both sides. A is the tight place which stood 
the closest to gauge, alike on both sides. A shows 



34 

the blows applied directly on the defect. B shows 
that the rim has to be stretched to let the opening 
out ; this equalizes the metal. A saw will often 
show as many as two of such places as A and B ex- 
tending nearer to rim and center. A saw, to be 
equally tensioned, will stand oflFthe same way almost 
to a fraction all around, provided saw is true, 




which in all cases should be done on the pad before 
testing for unequal tension. Some places are very 
firm and require much more hammering than is 
expected. The same amount should be done on 
both sides ; if there showed to be a slight diflference 



35 



in the saw, then the heaviest blows on the fullest 
side. This variation can be but little, otherwise it 
will be a lump instead of unequal tension. 

Fig. 2 shows how some attempt to remove such 
a place as B in Fig. i. The saw is hammered all 
over except that place, to equalize the tension. 
Such work is never attended with good results, 
because few saws are equally tempered, conse- 
quently the milder places are opened more than 




Fi«. 2. 

the harder, so other unequal places are brought 
about. I deem it necessary here to make such ex- 
planation because to see it in but one light leaves 



36 

no conclusion that my method is any better than 
others. 

What is wanted in adjusting the tension of a 
saw is to gauge only from rim to collar, that is, the 
center. This is where its momentum begins and 
is not affected here by speed, but should be left 
stiff; that is, saw not opened clear down to the 
center. In testing a saw clear across from edge to 
edge, the drop is so much from the straightedge 
that there is but little certainty in its distortion. 
Unequal temper will cause a drop which will in- 
dicate more irregularity than there is, thus deceiv- 
ing a man. This is if saw is not gauged from the 
center (or near there) the weight of saw will 
deceive, and when testing across the center such a 
place as B^ Fig. i, may be a soft place, it having 
that appearance as it is a loose place. When this 
place is adjusted from rim to center so that saw 
stands off equally from straightedge, it would 
not appear the same if the edges of saw were 
supported and center sagged free, because place 
B would sag more and would seem to be unequal 
afterit had been adjusted as described. Because the 
saw is softer at B does not say that it is on the 
rim, so if rim is again stretched by testing with 
center sagging, saw will not have a running tension 
and will not run well. Tension must be corrected 



37 



in relation to the action of centrifugal force, then 
a perfect saw will be the result. 




Pig. 3 shows the action of centrifugal force and 
how a saw should be adjusted. C shows that one- 
third of the saw from the center should be left 
stiff. D shows that the opening should begin at 
line C and diminish after passing line B, A shows 
how centrifugal force opens the rim and diminishes 
at line B^ which is one-third of the diameter. 

Pig. 4 shows different positions of saws. A 
shows a saw too open near center, as shown at D, 
B shows a saw properly opened, being equally one- 
half way between center and rim. C shows saw 
opened too near rim. E shows the saw with long 



straightedge applied across it, being opened prop- 
erly as at B. D shows a high speeded saw open 
too near center, as at A, a low speed stiff saw will 
stand off but little from the straightedge. In 
adjusting the unequal tension of a saw, it is best 
to have the saw open about to the speed at which 




Ft^-H- 



it is to run, because it will spring easier and show 
up defects plainer. In tensioning saws, the best 
plan with high speeded saws is'as follows : As all 
saws grow large on the rim, such saws, when need- 
ing more tension, should have the tight places in 
the tension removed. This done will invariably 
bring the tension up to its proper opening. To 
illustrate this : A saw needing a little more 
tension, by examining for unequal places one or 



39 

more firm places can be found. They may show 
but very little. Now, such places removed may 
make saw a little too open ; if so, examine for a 
place a little loose, as B^ Fig. i, and remove it ; 
then the saw will be perfect. This is why I say 
that an expert hammerer will not hammer uniform- 
ly, but as to the condition of the tension, unless 
overhauling a saw or changing the speed consider- 
ably. 

It will be noticed in testing a saw for unequal 
'tension on my patent bench, that a saw will stand 
oflF farther for a soft place (alike on both sides of 
the saw), and will stand closer to the straightedge 
for a tight place. In a plainer term, loose places 
appear as though the saw was thinner at that place, 
tight places appearing thicker. This is when the 
saw is tested from the concave side. 



BROKEN SAWS. 



WHAT BREAKS THEM AND HOW TO REPAIR. 
ANOTHER FORM OF UNEQUAL TENSION. 



Broken saws sometimes seem a mystery for the 
cause ; but nine times out of ten there is a cause. 
Fig. 5 shows a cracked saw — two cracks on the 



40 

rim. Seldom but one crack forms in the rim of a 
saw as shown, which should have a three-eighths or 




one-half hole drilled at the extremity to prevent 
going any farther. Cut shows the neglect of drill- 
ing when a crack appears. It takes but a short 
w^hile to ruin, if not to burst, the saw. Cut shows 
two holes ; that nearest the rim is counter sunk on 
both sides to receive a soft iron rivet, copper will 
do. It should be riveted tight and dressed down 
smooth. Do not use hard metal, as it will spring 
the crack open. Such places are invariably caused 
from a distorted or unequal tension, treated farther 



41 

on. 5 shows a crack in the center. This is 
caused by saw crowding out of log, or from jamming; 
small collars are a frequent cause of broken 
saws at the collar. This is a very important item 
which seems to be entirely overlooked by manu- 
facturers. Thin saws can be successfully run on 
large collars. A 60" 8 gauge saw on a 5" collar 
will not run as well as a 10 gauge 60" on an 8" 
collar. This large collar theory will astound any 
who will think for a minute how much stifFer a 
saw is made by clamping only a fraction more of 
the plate. No saw is as stiff standing on the floor 
on edge as when screwed up on collars, and while 
the difference is from 2 to 3" in size of saw, is but 
a small item where a thin saw is necessary in 
valuable timber. 

Invariably the tension of a saw is extended too 
close to the rim, as shown in Fig. 3, the dark lines 
showing the tension. In locating the condition of 
such a saw, it will stand off* from the straightedge 
as at A^ Fig. 5, D being the center line which 
should show the most opening at that point ; but 
it would be noticed that the most opening is above 
D and nearer the rim than center, line A showing 
that the tension is not run to the extreme edge, 
also shown by position of dark lines. A shows a 
place ranging from 3 to 5" in from the rim, accord- 
ing to size of saw. Great trouble is often ex- 



42 



perienced in cold climates from broken saws, which 
could often be obviated. Cut-ofF saws often suffer 
from fracture. Such saws should be stretched on 
the rim, say hammer two or three times, beginning 
directly at the throats of the teeth. This, of course, 
will necessitate the opening of the center. All 
such saws should be run as slack on the rim as 
possible. They will-stand more abuse, which they 




certainly get. The leaving of case-harden from 
the emery wheel invariably will crack a saw. 
While high speeded saws stand from the straight- 
edge, as C, Fig. 4, it is a safe plan to open the rim 
a little. Firecracks in tempering often cause saws 
to crack. Defects that have never been discovered 



in steel cause fracture. As small a thing as a 
mark at the throat of tooth will sometimes cause a 




fracture, to say nothing of the filing square corners, 
etc., which should be guarded against, especially 
in high speeds. 

Fig. 8 shows the worst form of unequal tension 
that can be in a saw, and is brought about, as may 
be said, in a practical way. A saw can be in this 
condition and show up to be equally tensioned 
from the ordinary test, that is, no tight and loose 
places, and not have a running tension. A shows 
that the saw is too open near center, caused by 
hammering down to the collar. This saw is illus- 
trated at A^ Fig. 4, the straightedge showing the 



44 



most opening near the center. B^ Fig. 8, shows a 
tight line in the saw near where it should be the 
most open. To stand this saw on edge and give 
it a shake with both hands it will be noticed that 




UNEQUAL TENSION OF ANOTHER FORM. 

CEIVINC SAW. 



A DE- 



line B remains the firmest part of the saw, the rim 
quivering very similar to a saw that is too slack on 
the rim. If my rule is followed by keeping a saw 
the most open half way between center and rim, 
no such trouble will be had. Such a saw as Fig. 
8 wiH stand pretty close to the straightedge to 
nearly half way from the rim ; this is when the saw 



45 

is dished. Such a saw is not so much aflFected 
only in high speed. This saw will dish back and 
forth with a jerk, and yet the rim is so slack that 
saw will snake and not cut a straight line. I have 
seen such a saw 66" run 6 inches out of its course 
without heating but little, the rim being loose, the 
center dished, allowing saw to almost cross the log. 
Over one dozen saw hammerers tried to remedy 
this saw only to make it worse, hammering first 
the rim, then the center, omitting part B, Such 
a saw wants close observation when shaken while 
standing on edge. A high speeded saw in good 
condition will shake more at the center from a 
vibration. It is not expected for the rim to remain 
still, as it will vibrate a little, but saw should sag 
back and forth to within a few inches of the rim. 
Such a saw is remedied by hammering on line B. 
Fig. 9 represents a peculiar form of twisted saw 
caused by unequal tension. This saw may be 
termed sprung on the quarters. What gets a saw 
in such a condition is hammering in segments from 
rim to center, opening certain parts more than 
others. Such a saw will appear as though it was 
too slack on the rim ; but when treating the center 
it gets no better. The cause of this is that there 
are as many tight lines running from rim to center 
as there are loose places, so the hammering that 
expands the saw opens these loose lines as much 



46 



as the tight* ones are opened, so the saw in reality 
is made no better. The only remedy for these tight 




Fl«. 9.-ANOTHER FORM OF UNEQUAL TENSION. 

A TWISTED SAW. 

lines is to hammer from rim to center in the same 
manner as has been done. This is the only way 
to neutralize the tension. Such tight lines are 
located by resting the saw with one edge on the 
anvil while on the bench and spring the saw up 
and down, noting the parts that are the stiffest, 
marking them and moving saw to be certain that 
such parts are the stiffest. Hammering with the 



47 

cross or long peine soon brings about such results. 
Only reckless hammering can get a saw in that 
shape. 

There might be much more said about unequal 
tension, but if these instructions are complied with 
any saw may and can be made to run better. I 
will say that such saws are often found where a 
half dozen or so of traveling hammerers have been. 
When a saw won't stiflFen (if too open) by stretch- 
ing the rim there is this trouble. The same way 
in the center of saw when saw does not appear to 
improve in tension after much hammering. Keep 
in mind that a loose saw on the rim often assumes 
such shapes (winding), but when treated half dozen 
lines in center a great change is noticed, while the 
former will not improve. 



BAND LOG SAWS. 



It is not necessary here to enter into any dis- 
cussion of the utility of the band saw for convert- 
ing choice logs into lumber. They have come to 
stay, and their introduction generally is only 
limited to the skill to be had in their care and 
operation. They are no more an experiment but 
a success. Their capacity is only determined by 
the skill in charge, viz.: the filer. Unprece- 
dented results are almost daily heard of and their 



48 

capacity has never been reached. Some records 
show a greater output in the same time than the 
circular, showing as high as one hundred and fifty 
thousand feet cut in eleven hours. The chief merit 
of the band saw lies of course in its economy of 
saw kerf — cutting out but one-eighth inch, against 
the five-sixteenths inch of a circular. Another 
advantage is its ability to saw wide boards or 
plank from large logs. Every mill man knows 
that this cannot be done with two circular saws 
without the board showing more or less of an off- 
set on its face, owing to the practical impossibility 
of getting the saws to "track" in the same line. 
There is no scoring the face of the log as with the 
rear teeth of a circular saw. The cut as a rule is 
smoother, and consequently there is less waste in 
surfacing, so that lumber may be made nearer the 
ultimate thickness than when sawed with a circu- 
lar. These are considerations that directly affect 
one's pocket-book, and if any doubt exists as to 
their validity there are means at hand, happily, 
that will enable every person to investigate for him- 
self to his heart's content. There are nearly one 
thousand band-mills in use in the United States 
and Canada. There is a growing disposition ob- 
served on the part of some users in favor of 
wider saws than have hitherto been employed, 
and I am inclined to join them in their belief. I 



49 

think that a blade ten inches wide at the beginning 
and 14 or 15 gauge is bound to give satisfactory 
results and run well for a long time. It can wear 
down to six inches, or even less perhaps, without 
seriously affecting its usefulness, but by having it 
good width at the start its life is prolonged to just the 
extent that the additional inch or two adds to the 
circular. Hence, it is economy to have the saw 
as wide as possible at the outset. In connection 
with this point the query might naturally be pro- 
pounded: If a ten inch blade is good, why is not 
one twelve inches, or even wider, better? The 
answer would be : For the reason that saw makers, 
as a rule, are not in favor of anything wider than 
ten inches, owing to the trouble they experience, 
with the facilities at their present command, in 
properly tempering blades of greater width. The 
day may come when wider saws will be used, but 
for the present ten inches is the limit for general 
practice. 

I shall not confine myself to any particular 
make of mill. It may be said that all manufac- 
turers have mills doing good work. What the 
band-mill wants to-day is a perfect saw — a saw 
that will stand up to the work and make even lum- 
ber. One serious trouble in band-mills which the 
makers have endeavored to overcome is the ** over- 
throw " of the upper wheel, which is caused in 



50 

various ways, principally from the want of suf- 
ficient motive power to maintain a uniform speed. 
It prevails among many that as a band saw cuts 
a much less kerf than the circular, less, or even 
the same power, will operate the band. This is 
not so. On the contrary, the band must have 
more power behind it. Overthrow transmits the 
slack side of the saw over to the cutting side, there- 
by making dishing boards, especially in broad cuts, 
where the power may vary. Such lumber does 
not show this defect from its edges as the circular 
does, but shows up in surfacing. Great stress is 
put on the saw by this overthrow and tends to 
crack the blade. Another cause of slight over- 
throw and bad lumber is badly fitted and too many 
teeth. The tension may be good, but if the 
points of the teeth are not in good shape this re- 
sistance, or stress, though of short duration, is 
thrown upon the imperfect saw while passing 
through knots, hard and tough parts of the log, 
beyond the sawyer^s conception. Such is the case 
with too little set, too heavy back set swaging, 
which is hard on all kinds of saws which are less 
delicate and more sensitive than the band. An- 
other detriment to verticle saws is engaging the 
ends of square cut logs, causing a sudden stress 
and vibration imparted to the cutting edge. The 
inclined mill overcomes this to a certain extent. 



51 

but is attended by disadvantages, in which the at- 
traction of gravity is not overcome in the inclined 
position of the wheel. The slightest defect in the 
bearing on the balance of the wheel imparts a 
wabbling tendency which seriously affects the run- 
ning of the saw. 



TEETH-THEIR DISTANCE FROM POINT 
TO POINT. FILING AND SWACINC. 

From the authority of the best manufacturers 
and users, from seven-eighths to two inches is the 
limit from point to point, governed by the kind of 
wood and capacity of mill. It is a fact that the 
band saw can have too many teeth, and when such 
is the case is attended with serious results. 

Teeth that are too close together have many 
disadvantages — first, difficult of properly swaging, 
more sharpening and a choking or packing of the 
dust between saw and log, especially in dry and 
hard wood ; more power is required and the saw 
runs more or less warm on the tooth edge, which 
causes it to snake. Teeth too close invariably 
will not allow sufficient hook without too round 
a back; while the back may clear freely, a 
*'roman'' back will not stand the feed. What is 
wanted in a band saw is as little friction on the 
teeth (or tendency to shove the saw over) as pos- 



52 

sible. Many saws are ruined quickly in this way. 
Too many teeth when in nice fix are not the best 
for the saw, to say nothing of stub points, heavy 
round corners, irregular set, etc. All this is a 
detriment to the saw, and in hard, dry logs it is 
no common thing to see a saw not take it. If 
filers would file and keep the teeth in the right 
shape, teeth 2" apart will work better, but not with 
sharp corners filed in throat or too narrow a throat, 
as will be treated further on. 




FIfl:. I. -SHAPES OF TEETH, FILING AND SWAGING. 

Fig. I shows various shaped teeth. It is an 
extremely difficult matter to impress filers with the 
importance of a perfect shaped tooth, that is, to 
maintain it. It can be noticed among what may 
be called good average filers that two saws fitted 
up may appear precisely the same in appearance 
as to finish of teeth, and yet one saw will cut just 
twice the lumber that the other will. T]je expert 



53 

filer will very readily detect the saws. The prac- 
tice among the best filers is to be confined to no 
particular pitch of teeth, owing to the working 
condition of the mill and the difference of timber. 
Even the same kind of timber in different locali- 
ties requires a slight variation, for only a limited 
quantity of work from the saw can be had; but 
where capacity with good sawing with care of 
machinery is what is wanted, one-quarter pitch 
to a tooth three-fourths of an inch long may be 
considered the best tooth for soft wood. Tooth A^ 
Fig. I, is the best tooth. This shows a tooth one 
and one-half inches from point to point. Hard 
wood requires a shorter tooth and slightly less 
pitch. Tooth B shows the average tooth among 
mills. This tooth will pull very heavy and will 
tend to crowd the back guide. C shows a tooth 
with a sharp throat that is too slim. Such a tooth 
may not crack the saw, but there is danger of it, 
as shown in cut. The dust will pack as a wedge. 
There not being suflScient clearance, teeth B and 
C will pull very heavy and will dodge, from the 
fact that the backs are too high, tooth is too thick. 
A shows the best tooth for all kinds of sawing. 
A cannot have as large a throat as B, but it does 
not need it. If C had a straight back and round 
throat, tooth would clear well. The tendency is 
to hold the dust against the front of the tooth. 



54 

Unless the back is of proper shape, saw will not 
stand up. The back of the tooth has more to do 
with a nice cutting saw than the front. Many do 
not believe this, but an experiment will demon- 
strate it and costs nothing. 

Tooth A cannot be used on saws of teeth too 
close together, that is, saws of one and one-fourth 
inches, and some are less from point to point. In 
such cases it is best to run a little less pitch to 
maintain as near a straight back as possible. 
Such saws of course do not require as long a 
tooth, they being closer together. 

Tooth I is also a very good tooth and is much 
easier kept up on an automatic sharpener. 2 
shows the result of pointing up with the file 
square corners, producing cracks. Tooth i will 
do very well for light or limited power, as it will 
cut lighter than A, Many band saws do not have 
suflScient power. They require more power than 
a circular. This is necessary in keeping up the 
momentum of the wheels. If tooth i are as close 
together as one and one-fourth inches, spring and 
partly swaged set may be successfully used. 



FILING AND SETTING BAND SAWS, 

They should be full swaged set. For resaw- 
ing, machinery and variety saws, they are sprung 



55 

set. D shows properly swaged and set. E shows 
too heavy a swage — not too much set, but too 
heavy and bulky a comer. Such a tooth will 
pull very heavily and snake, especially in hard or 
uneven grained logs. F shows tooth for hard 
wood, which has less set and a heavier comer. If 
a saw is true and well hammered very little set 
can be used. Too much set is invariably used. 
A true saw 15 gauge will run well with one-eighth 
set, which is sufficient. A true saw with just the 
proper set is easier kept up, the saw runs lighter 
and keeps itself cleaner. 0:nly a close set can be 
run in hard wood, especially if dry or of a brittle 
nature. 

Spring set teeth are not advisable on heavy 
feed. It is often that saws have too many teeth 
for power. In such cases the right kind of a 
spring tooth, as at G^ will run much lighter and 
will cut well under moderate feed, and will stand 
crowding if teeth are not over one and one-fourth 
inches apart. H shows a bad tooth that will not 
run. The set will close and there is danger of its 
springing into the work in tough knots. G is 
sprung near the point, which alleviates friction. 

With all the improved tools now to be had, 
band saws can be kept up in the most approved * 
manner. The automatic sharpener and swage are 
indispensable, especially the former. There are 



66 

some good hand swages that work well. The 
teeth should be sharpened to a 'fine edge. This 
can be done on the automatic machine when there 
are plenty of saws in stock. A saw will not work 
well sharpened hurriedly on an automatic; neither 
is it a good plan to point up with the file. Either 
make a practice of it or not at all. 

Considerable filing has to be done where gravel 
and spikes come in contact with the saw. In 
swaging it is best to use a special swage. There 
are good automatic swages, but a good plan is to 
have a hand swage. The park swage being about 
the best in connection. The teeth should be 
swaged as much as possible from the front of the 
tooth. The teeth should be kept just the proper 
shape ; then set the swage so as to draw out the 
tooth, and by no means to upset or stub the point. 
The points of the teeth should be kept uniform in 
length. If an automatic sharpener is used, the 
back edge of saw must be kept straight, or it 
will be impossible to keep a nice, true running 
edge. 

The teeth of band saws should be sidedressed 
to an even set, with a slight underfiling to relieve 
friction, caused by a square set, as shown at E^ 
Fig. I. It must be borne in mind that the band 
saw is very sensitive, and a more perfect saw in 
every respect should be the aim of the filer. To 



67 

increase the feed, give a little more licx)k, but in 
all cases the teeth must be nearer perfect. A saw 
with badly fitted teeth may have too much hook, 
while the same hook would not be suflScient if 
point was in perfect shape. 



HAMMERING BAND SAWS. 

Hammering band saws requires great care and 
precision. I shall not introduce any new method 
from that in general use by practical filers. The 
secret of success lies in the saw being properly 
hammered. Band saws are hammered in a simi- 
lar manner to the gang saw. The principal 
feature is to prevent the saw from fracture and re- 
tain its proper tension. This is accomplished by 
not extending the tension to the extreme^ edge, as 
will be further illustrated. The tension of a band 
saw should be such that its central part will be 
slacker, or longer, than the edges, so that the 
edges of the saw will be the tightest and main- 
tain its position on the wheel. The idea may be 
explained in a simple manner as follows: Take 
a piece of ribbon' or other similar substance, grasp 
it in the center and draw tightly. It will be 
noticed that both edges are rendered slack and is 
easily vibrated. Then change the strain to the 
edges and it will be readily seen that it is firm and 



58 



stiflF. Though simple, the principle is explained. 
The central parts are hammered open, as shown 
in Fig. I. A shows how the tensio"ti is applied, 
hammering, as shown by the dotted marks, extend- 
ing nearly but not to the extreme edge. 




C 



c--/^ 



Fi^ 



.L 




^^^^^^ 




In tensioning a band saw only a round face 
hammer should be used, and it must be perfectly 
smooth. Anvil should be heavy so that there will 
be no rebound. The great trouble with most men 
in hammering band saws is that entirely too heavy 
blows are applied. This soon gets the saw lumpy 
and requires from 25 to 50 per cent, more power 
to pull it. All this comes directly on the saw. 
Such saws require much more set, which makes 



69 

it liable to dodge or snake and liable to fracture. 
A true saw with just the proper set will run much 
truer and stand more feed. A good plan is to 
have some oily waste on hand by which the saw 
can be slightly oiled. This will prevent marring 
the blade. A doghead hammer is best, of not 
over four and one-half pounds weight, though a 
balanced hammer maybe used, care'being exercised 
that the blows are applied plumb. The idea of 
applying glancing or angling blows to expand the 
steel in but one direction is erroneous. B shows 
the plan of stretching the edges of the saw when 
the tension is too close to the edge, the blows being 
applied close together directly to the edge. C 
shows how the saw is supported in testing the 
tension, 2 showing the straightedge as applied 
while saw is in this position. It should show light 
under the straightedge, say one-thirty-second of an 
inch in an 8" saw. A convex straightedge is best, as 
there is no guesswork as to the amount of open- 
ing. D shows how the saw should sag when 
properly tensioned, the saw resting close to the 
straightedge, or nearly, at each edge. This shows 
that the tension is not run too close to the edge. E 
shows tension too close to edge, which will cause 
saw to crack ; besides, such a saw almost continu- 
ally requires hammering, as the least gumming 
elongates the tooth edge. H shows a saw with 



60 

tension too far from the edge. Such a saw will not 
run true and will snake, slipping on wheels and tend- 
ing to run oflf, running unsteady. This saw is open in 
the center, but the edges are slack, very similar to F, 
which shows a saw tight in the center. This needs 
no further explanation. 

These defects are located with the saw in the 
position of C, saw being lifted with the left hand, 
straightedge applied with the right. A good north 
or east light should be had. Many argue the 
point that the tension must be run close to the 
edge to produce good results. True, a saw will 
run better, but this is nothing in comparison to 
preventing a broken saw. Thereare exceptions, and 
some saws have run remarkably with tension close 
to edge; but by no means should this be practiced. 
In narrow blades it is often extremely diffi- 
cult to get a saw to run true. The bet- 
ter plan which all saw manufacturers and 
mill builders advocate is wider saws, some 
mills using 12" saws to No. 14 gauge. Such 
a saw properly fitted will stand more feed than 
any circular. Wide saws have many advantages: 
can be strained tighter, have more contact, and 
can be made stiflfer, without the liability of break- 
ing. Wide saws will not make or cut as dishing 
as a narrower saw. Narrow saws tend too much 



HI 



toward the principle of the narrower shop saw, 
viz.: cutting an irregular course. 





fv^'^ 



Fig. 2 shows a crooked back saw and how to 
hammer it straight. A shows saw long on the 
tooth edge. A saw tends to get in that condition. 
Promiscuous hammering will get a saw in that con- 
dition, which is explained farther on, which also 
causes a saw to vibrate to and fro on the wheel. 
This is a very serious defect in the way of making 
a good running saw. Such places in spots in a 
saw cause this vibration. If saw is elongated on 
the tooth edge it will crowd hard against the back 
guide, and often cannot be regulated by tilting the 
upper wheel. A shows how to hammer the back 
of saw, doing most of the work on the edge, 
gradually diminishing to the teeth. Great care 



62 

must be exercised to have the tension right when 
back is brought straight, otherwise much more 
work is necessary. The back of saw should be a 
trifle full. This will put most of the strain on the 
front or tooth edge, making the saw much stiffer. 
A perfectly true straightedge should be used, saw 
lying flat on leveling table. The tooth edge seldom 
needs opening, and when necessary should be done 
the same as described on the back. In no case 
should the saw be cut or marred on the extreme 
edge, which crystallizes the steel. Cracks can 
often be traced from such places. In fact, the 
hammer should not show a print. Lightblows and 
more of them are the life of the saw. In stretch- 
ing a band saw, the same amount of work, as near 
as possible, should be done on both sides, otherwise 
the saw will not run so well, but will tend to leave 
that side too much from the straightedge. Little 
attention is paid to lumps in tensioning. If saw 
is very lumpy or twisting it must be straightened 
before a uniform tension can be determined. 



STRAIGHTENING BAND SAWS. 

This is done on a leveling table. The saw is 
laid flat on the table and all lumps located with a 
12" straightedge, applying it straight across, then 
at diffierent angles, locating any twisted places that 



63 



may appear. Such places always start from the 
edge and will be found the most prominent there. 
Such places are located in the ordinary way by 
applying the straightedge at right angles, applying 
the blows with the straight peine parallel and in 
the direction of the straightest way of the saw. 



I ^ 



-f 



\ 



\ 



W 
I 



1l 



T 






^^^ 



'^ 



T' 



jL 



B 



F-ig. 3- 



■\\\V^ 



Fig. 3 shows the application of blows in 
straightening, A showing that most of the blows 
are applied directly on the edge of the saw. Here 
is a great mistake made by many, that is, not being 
impressed that a saw springs more on the edges 
than at center. Nine-tenths of the straightening 
should be done on or near the edge. Band saws 
spring more in the shape of a twist than in round 
lumps, and when a saw shows to be crooked on 
the edge the long peine hammer is always used, 
and nine times out of ten the saw will be straight 



64 

and show but few lumps. If the round peine 
hammer is used on the edge of the saw it cannot 
be straightened without raising a lump on the 
other side. The extreme edge of the saw will 
tend to curl or lift up. When the straightedge 
is applied parallel with the saw and a lump is 
located, very often it will not show when applied 
across the saw. Sometimes lumps are found in 
the center that show the same in different posi- 
tions of the straightedge. In such cases the round 
peine hammer is used. 

jff, Fig. 3, shows a bent saw, also shown at C 
E shows a badly twisted or bent place. Saws are 
sprung in this way by being thrown off the 
wheels. When such places as E will not yield 
readily under the hammer great care should be 
taken not to fracture the saw. It should be sprung 
down to a solid bearing on the block, that the blows 
be applied as firm as possible. Such places may 
be peined down if desired. Sometimes it is neces- 
sary to heat the saw here. This is done by heat- 
ing a heavy piece of iron or tongues and heating 
that part to a dark red heat, which will allow the 
saw to be bent back. This must be done while 
the saw is hot. This draws the temper, but the 
proper tension will not affect its running. Very 
often such places have to be cut out and a piece 



65 

soldered in. This can easily be done with good 
soldering tools. 

The greatest detriment to the longevity of the 
band saw is the steel crystallizing, and this is 
brought about no quicker than with too much 
hammering, not only too much hammering, but 
such pounding as most men do. After a saw is 
once got in good condition it requires but little 
hammering to be kept up. The man who is con- 
tinually belting away on a saw is not the man that 
will succeed. 

FRACTURED 8AW8.-UNEQUAL TENSION. 

A glance into nearly every file room will dem- 
onstrate that something is wrong from the 
number of broken saws. Saws are fractured in 
many ways, nearly if not all makes with excep- 
tions. Some make saws that will run without 
fracture if properly treated. Tension too close to 
edge, too much tension, will tend to fracture. 
Unequal tension is another cause. A place of no 
more than 6" of unequal tension, that is, too close 
to edge, will endanger a saw. A saw should have 
precisely the same opening and the most directly 
in the center, unless a narrow saw with broad face 
crowning wheels, which is seldom the case ; but 
when such is, the tension must be a trifle toward 
the back from the center, so that the teeth will 
clear the edge. Especially along the front and 



66 

back, the opening must be the same. The saw 
crowding against back guide, glazing and often 
case-hardening the back, where there is any trouble 
of this kind, a piece of soft emery wheel should be 
held against the back edge while saw is moving 
slowly. This will produce a new surface and re- 
lieves all such anticipations. Saw should run with 
teeth as far over as possible, with back guides set 
so that the set of the teeth cannot be backed on to 
the wheel ; but a saw in good order will almost 
keep its course on the wheels. It may be said that 
it is of the utmost importance to keep the wheels 
clean. This is a great annoyance in many mills, 
especially with too many teeth and slow feed. A 
fine powdered dust is cut which the teeth partly 
carry around and deposit on the edge of the wheel. 
This, of course, adds to the strain on the edge. 
Saws often have the strain too much on the front 
edge, especially where the back is kept convex, as 
many do. Irregular motion is very hard on a saw. 
As the saw enters the cut a slowing motion causes 
considerable overthrow, especially with heavy up- 
per wheels. It is a great mistake with many in 
erecting band mills in not having ample power. 
The calculation should be for twice the power that 
the circular requires. In the first place it requires 
as much power to keep the motion of the wheels 
up as it does to drive the saw. An automatic^ 



67 

closely regulated engine must be used for good 
results. That checking of speed throws consider- 
able strain on back or slack side of saw, which 
results in fracture where there is any defect in 
tension or on the edge of saw. This checking 
motion makes very bad lumber, that is, bad places, 
by the center being cut in a concave shape. As 
stated, too sharp or narrow a gullet must not be 
used, especially with a **roman" back tooth. A 
straight, or as near so as can be, should be used, 
and extra precaution taken that emery wheel does 
not case-harden. Wheel should be kept free from 
all glaze or greasy spots with a clean cutting 
surface. 

BRAZING BAND SAWS. 

This is a very particular feature, and while it 
is easily accomplished with the proper tools, many 
filers are troubled about making a good job. One 
important part is to get a good, smooth, even lap. 
This allows the solder to be of uniform thickness, 
which adheres better. The scarfing may be done 
with a milling or grinding machine, or may be 
scarfed with a file and scraper, being careful to get 
it uniform. On 8" saws and above ^" lap is 
plenty. Narrow saws require much less. Every 
mill should have a good soldering outfit, which I 
need not describe. Use silver solder, which can 
be had for the express purpose and of any width, 



68 

which should be just the width of the lap. Clean 
the laps and solder with chemical pure muriatic 
acid ; place in position with the back edge perfectly 
straight. Irons should be heated to a bright 
cherry red in a clam charcoal fire and applied 
quickly on the lap, clamped tightly, remaining 
until saw has nearly cooled. Then remove and if 
joint is sprung a little straighten it down before 
saw gets entirely cold, as it will yield better and 
not be as liable to affect the joint, care being used 
not to strike too heavy and hammer the joint as 
little as possible. File off any spurious solder and 
make a smooth joint, and tension to the require- 
ment. Some recommend pure silver filings 15 
parts, pure white brass 5 parts, copper 2 parts, 
place the powdered metal between the laps, then 
with a blow pipe and powdered charcoal heat un- 
til the metal fuses. This requires considerable 
heat and is not generally used, unless among 
narrow saws. Silver solder can be had from any 
saw maker. If it is not good, braze will not take. 
Apply irons immediately after applying acid. 

NARROW BAND SAWS. 

Such saws require but little tension aside from 
keeping the edges straight. This is accomplished 
by stretching the blade gently back to the teeth. 
Round edge files should be used to guard against 



69 

cracks. Sufficient pitch should be given to pre- 
vent saw pressing against stay pin. The wheels 
should be kept clean and true. Great care should 
be used in starting the saw, to not start it too 
quick. Straightening such saws can be done while 
it is on the wheel by slacking the saw, then with 
a short straightedge mark all the defects, using a 
light, straight, peine hammer against a smooth- 
faced mallet. Defects can be easily located with 
the eye by pressing saw back to a perpendicular. 
The object of slacking the strain is to let such de- 
fects show themselves. In tensioning or stretch- 
ing the saw, it is best to remove it from the wheels 
and use a long straightedge, making the back 
perfectly straight. Then the saw will run steady. 

SPEED OF BAND SAWS, 

The speed of band log saws ranges from seven 
to nine thousand feet per minute. Nine thousand 
speed can easily be run if mill is well set, good 
workmanship and wheels well balanced. The 
latter is very important and requires the greatest 
precision to get them in perfect running balance. 
Power is another important item. With ample 
power and close regulation a higher speed may be 
attained ; but on the contrary, saws should not run 
as high as eight thousand feet, and some even seven 
thousand. The saw cannot do good work at too 



70 . 

slow a speed ; yet it is dangerous to the life of a 
saw to run at a varying speed with limited power 
and bad regulation. Small saws are run at an 
average of four to six thousand feet, which greatly 
depends on the condition of the saw and wheels. 

FOUNDATION CARRIAGE AND TRACK. 

The foundation of the band mill should be very 
solid, built of brick and concrete, with a very 
broad, deep base. The mill should not be set 
directly on the mason work, but should have tim- 
bers between. There are instances where band 
mills would not run, being set directly on mason 
work. This was due to a slight defect in the 
balance of the wheels. The carriage and track 
should be perfect, built independent of mill frame, 
solid, level and perfectly straight. Steel turned 
wheels are better than chilled. They run and 
wear smoother. The carriage itself should be in 
perfect line, with no end motion in bearings. This 
calls for a good ofiFset device, which should be 
under immediate control of setter. 

SAWS ADAPTED TO MILLS OF SMALL CAPACITY. 
FILING, SWAGING AND GUMMING. 

Part I. 

In all books published on filing saws, none have 

been gotten up to be of practically any value to 

the filer. They recommend a certain style tooth. 



71 

etc., as being universal, regardless of the capacity 
of mill and kind of timber to be sawed ; conse- 
quently when the filer or sawyer applies the tooth 
or saw he is surprised at having worse results. 
There is as much difference in a saw adapted to a 
mill of five thousand feet capacity and one of fifty 
thousand capacity as there is in the cutting of the 
mills. Even saws of same size gauge and speed 
do not require to be near alike in condition. This 
I will plainly demonstrate. The reader who ap- 
plies the style of tooth I recommend will be more 
than surprised at results. A common fault is too 
.many teeth. Mr. A. is having good success with 
fifty teeth in his saw. Mr. B. is not doing well, 
but, to improve matters, imitates Mr. A., gets a 
saw with fifty teeth. His saw had thirty, the 
proper number. To his great surprise, saw will 
not go as well as the old one did. I mention this 
as there are thousands of similar instances in the 
mill business. Too many teeth consume nearly 
fifty per cent, more power, besides making twenty 
to thirty per cent, bad lumber, especially in hard 
wood, which is enough to break any man. Saw 
soon has to go to the repair shop, and all such de- 
lays and expenses cut a man's pocket strings. 
There is no reason why the small mill cannot saw 
one thousand feet of lumber just as cheap as the 
larger mills. 



72 




Fig. I shows a variety of teeth, showing shape 
of teeth and manner of setting. Tooth A shows 
the most economical tooth in the consumption of 
power and saw plate. This tooth is adapted for 
both hard and soft wood, the latter requiring a 
little longer tooth. All saws will stand more feed 
in soft wood. As an approximation, hard wood 
teeth should be from one to one and a quarter 
inches long, while soft wood may have a tooth one- 
quarter inch longer — from three-quarter inch to 
one and one-eighth inch gullet, or throat. Tooth 
^ is a tooth that will run very well and is adapted 



73 

to frozen timber, being very stiflF. It is also a very 
good hard wood tooth, though it has not quite 
sufficient pitch for easy cutting, it having one-half 
pitch while A has one-third. D shows the style 
of tooth used by many in hard wood, which is not 
a good tooth. The idea of throat room being the 
consideration, the back is ** scooped " out. Only in 
the softer logs will this tooth run to any degree of 
satisfaction, and will not run at all in hard buts 
or dry logs, the dust being cut so fine and of a 
mealy nature passes the throat and packs between 
the saw and log, heating the rim badly. The 
reader can recall many such instances. Too many 
teeth brings about precisely the same result. C 
and F show teeth that may be found among some 
mills, and need no discussion further than that the 
result invariably is a cracked saw, as shown at E^ 
which is the result of filing square corners. A and 
B are the teeth to be relied upon. If a burr gum- 
mer is used the throats may be under cut, as at H, 
Saws of small capacity should not have many 
teeth. For hard wood sixteen teeth to every inch 
of feed is plenty. If the filer swages well and has 
no trouble in keeping the corner of teeth, twelve 
teeth may be successfully used. Twelve teeth is 
about right for soft wood. Very thin saws, ten 
gauge, should have not less than sixteen teeth for 
any wood. Such teeth must not have too large a 



74 

gullet for hard wood. Soft wood is all right with 
larger throat. A saw for fifteen horse-power should 
not have over twenty-four teeth, and thirty for a 
twenty horse-power. For swaging and setting I 
advocate generally the double spread set, as at 
4. Some prefer such a tooth as 5 sprung and 
partly swaged, but this style of tooth will not hold 
good with the number of teeth that I recommend, 
as it will require at least twenty teeth to every 
inch of feed. In small mills where there are too 
many teeth, changing from a double spread to a 
spring tooth will help matters wonderfully. 6 
shows a tooth that has a rounding corner. This 
tooth will not run well and will call for more 
power to drive it. It should be filed sharp with 
outside corner a little longer, then swage a little. 
Never attempt to swage a tooth that is very dull. 
If your saw is disposed to crumble, file to almost an 
edge, then it will swage without splitting, as 
treated farther on. In gumming such saws great 
care should be exercised not to heat the saw with 
an emery wheel ; neither crowd a dull bit in a 
burr gummer, as it will stretch the rim and soon 
require hammering. The emery wheel is in most 
general use and is the best. Do not attempt to 
gum out too long or slim a tooth, as the saw will 
be heated more or less, besides changing the ten- 
sion so much that I have seen new saws require 



75 

hammering from one gumming, as already treated 
in hammering. It is always safe to remove all 
coloring where the wheel has worked. Not every 
time is blue case-harden, but case-harden spots are 
always blue ; hence the necessity of running the 
wheel slowly and touching lightly, which will. 
remove it all. This is understood where the wheel 
has worked. Some are of the opinion that if the 
saw is blued on the side of the tooth that it is case- 
hardened at that place. No matter how hot the 
saw should get, it cannot be case-hardened only 
where the wheel cuts. The work should be done 
uniformly, so that the saw will be in balance and 
all the teeth of the same pitch. A true circle 
should be struck at the required depth of tooth, 
then strike another line as shown by lines i and 
2, I being the line for light power. Then with a 
straightedge mark the pitch as shown by the 
straight lines, only mark to the depth of tooth. 

There will be noticed but a slight difference 
between A and B of Fig. 2 and of Fig. i. A 
shows the proper tooth for mills ranging from ten 
to twenty-five thousand feet capacity, which shows 
one-half pitch. B shows too stifl a tooth, back 
being too high, though it clears as shown. This 
style of tooth is better adapted to frozen or hard 
wood. It will not stand much feed on account of 
its high back. Many men are of the opinion that 



76 




TEETH FOR MILLS OF MEDIUM CAPACITY. 

Part II. 

if the back clears well that is all-sufficient. This 
can be worked on light power, but not successfully 
on 3" to 4" feed. The tendency is to press against 
or jamb the saw. A being a little stifFer, will 
answer for hard wood. Such saws require from 
forty-six to sixty teeth as to feed. C shows the 
proper shape point with a good stout corner with 
no shoulder for friction as at £*, which is a tooth 
recommended by saw makers ; but it will not work 
well after getting a little dull, as any one of ex- 



77 

perience' knows. It soon gets in the shape of F^ 
which needs no further explanation. As to the 
width of set, I am inclined to run enough set. 
Many are too close in this respect and lose twenty- 
five per cent, of their power by friction, which 
makes heat, which of course makes bad lumber. 
Then for the saving of one sixty-fourth of an inch 
do not ruin your saw. A seven gauge saw should 
have five-sixteenth inch scant set and not over five- 
sixteenth inch. Hard wood a little less. An eight 
gauge should have nine thirty-second inch scant, 
with good corners. An eight gauge will run very 
well with one-quarter inch full; ten gauge one- 
quarter scant. For gumming, refer to Part I. 
The filing should be done perfectly square, back 
and front. If saw will not run right from square 
filing, line, and if necessary, then hammer it. 

Fig. 3 shows the best tooth for our fastest mills. 
D shows a tooth with one-third pitch from the 
center, with a perfectly straight back. This tooth 
should not be over one and one-eighth inch long. 
Some might ask why is this tooth on the fastest 
saw only of the same length of the slowest feed. 
This is explained by the back being straight and 
allowing the whole space from point to point to 
chamber the dust. Saw with such a tooth is capa- 
ble of standing eight up to ten and twelve inch 
feed, which calls for one hundred teeth, about as 




TEETH FOR MILLS OF LARGEST CAPACITY. 

Part ni. 
many as can be put in a sixty inch saw, which is 
not quite up to the required number. Now, one 
hundred teeth in a saw like A, Fig. i, would not 
stand the feed, and if it did, the throat would be so 
narrow that it would not chamber any dust. This 
tooth often measures but two and one-fourth inches 
from point to point, but will chamber a quantity of 
dust. The short pitch is also necessary, as a fast 
feed saw will not stand up well even with one-half 
inch pitch, This tooth has all of its lesistance, or 



79 

Strain, directly on the front of tooth; then it is 
plain that the tremendous speed of log onto saw 
will not jainb or push against the saw, which 
would bulge or dish the blade from guide to cen- 
ter, which would throw the saw short out or in the 
cut, as many fast saws are noticed to do. A shows 
the proper tooth from a view of the swaging. B 
shows too slender a corner, though precisely the 
tooth 4, Fig I. This tooth will crumble, as the 
action is to scrape instead of cutting. C shows a 
heavy tooth which will run well for a while, but 
will require more power, as there is considerable 
friction. This represents the majority of work 
from the swage bar. ^ is a tooth that can be had 
with any of the standard lever or power swages. 
This saw will require considerable power to 
drive it, which is always, and should be, in large 
mills. The automatic sharpener should be used, 
or some of the good hand sharpeners, filing being 
too great a task ; besides, precision is very neces- 
sary. The changing of saws four to five times a 
day causes the sawyer some trouble if they all do 
not run nearly alike. . In many modern mills of 
to-day, power and economy of saw plate is no item. 
Such a tooth as C is necessary when but ten teeth, 
and sometimes a less number, cut an inch of feed. 
Ten inch feed with seventy teeth like C will do 
good work. 



80 





ri^^ -f . 






SWAGING 8AW8.-IM PROPER USE 
OF THE SWAGE. 

Fig. 4 represents various defective uses of the 
upset, a swage in common use. Its use when 
properly applied makes a good tooth for all small 
and medium capacity saws. A shows a dull tooth, 
which ought not to be, but should be filed to a 
thin edge, then it will swage well. B shows the 
result of swaging a dull or thick tooth. C shows 
a reckless "dead'' blow. Often the corner will 
not show its defect, but the first log sawed shows 
a "washboard'' mark. D shows the result of too 
heavy a blow on a partly sprung set. E shows a 
tooth too thick to swage, with but little accom- 
plished. Continual pounding on a tooth of this 
kind crystallizes the steel. F shows upset not 
properly set, leaning too much to the operator. 
Such work often results in a broken point, as 



81 

shown, and keeps a saw continually out of round. 
H shows how other teeth may be swaged, which 
requires no further explanation. G shows exces- 
sive blows on slim teeth, which puts a tooth in 
very bad shape. The upset should be used lightly 
with a clear ring from the hammer. A deadening 
sound indicates defective work. 

. The swage bar and hammer is a good swage 
when in the hands of a good user. When an 
automatic sharpener is used and a number of 
saws to be kept up, an automatic hand or power 
swage may be used. Such tools are good when 
used right, and on the contrary they ruin a tooth. 
No machine will do good work unless the filer 
knows just what good work is. A mill man who 
is not disposed to take hold of improvements needs 
no automatic swage. Only the well-up filers make 
a success of them. 

This engraving illustrates various shapes of 
teeth, showing economical and wasteful use of 
saw plate. Fig. i shows the extreme waste, which 
is a very slim tooth for hard wood. If this tooth 
were fitted for soft wood it would stand the heavi- 
est feed and not be a wasteful tooth, as its fast 
cutting fully compensates. Such a tooth on a 
small mill is wasteful and would not last half as 
long as tooth 2. Notice that its depth from point 
to throat is not more than half that of i. Its wear 




J 



83 

is nearer on the periphery of the saw, and not to- 
ward the center, as i. As shown, i chambers 
'twice as much dust as 2. Fig. 3 shows a tooth 
that will not chamber well. The irregular throat 
prevents clear circulation. Fig. 4 shows another 
wasteful tooth, good for nothing but as shown, 
viz. : a broken saw. Fig. 5 shows a tooth with the 
result of filing square corners. The tooth itself is 
slightly modified from a perfect saw. 



INSERTED TEETH 8AW9. THEIR UTILITY, 
CARE AND MANAGEMENT. 

The inserted tooth saw is the best saw in its 
place. The question is, How is the mill-man to 
know this ? Many men have failed in the busi- 
ness when if they had had a good inserted tooth 
saw would have made money. Then this subject 
is a matter of interest, that is, for mills of small 
capacity. 

I will now explain the advantages of a good 
inserted tooth saw. Some are not worth buying. 
If the mill-man is sawyer, filer, engineer, yard 
clerk, etc., the inserted tooth is much the best 
saw. This is with a man who may understand 
fairly well about gumming and filing. The prin- 
cipal difference cqmes in the saving of time. If a 
mill-man's time is worth more attending to cus- 



84 

tomers, belts, engine and machinery at odd times 
than it is to be buying emery wheels and files, 
losing time filing and gumming, to say nothing of 
saw growing smaller and requiring hammering, 
then there is no question about the inserted not 
being the best saw. In small mills from four to eight 
thousand capacity, I have noticed that the owner or 
sawyer attended very nearly to all the machinery, 
looking after the water. On the other hand, if mill 
is to be run regular and the sawyer knows his busi- 
ness, has an engineer, and has time to file his saw 
and gum it, and does it right the solid saw may be 
used ; but then there is an inclination to favor a 
good inserted tooth unless mill goes above fifteen 
thousand capacity. The great trouble about solid 
tooth saws is as I have stated already. They get 
too many teeth in them. It is a fact that with too 
many teeth and light power the best man in the 
world could not run a saw successfully, especially 
in hard wood. The inserted tooth overcomes this 
in that the makers do not and cannot put in so 
many teeth. The inserted tooth requires less 
hammering, which is an advantage to small mills, 
and many inserted tooth saws are run one to two 
years without re-gumming or hammering. The 
same mill with the solid would stand a good chance 
of having saw not only hammered several times, 
but would probably have hammered into another 



86 

new saw. Why ? Because a man that cannot file 
or swage a solid saw soon ruins it. With the in- 
serted there is some retort, viz. : put in a set of sharp 
teeth; hence a new saw every time. Inserted 
teeth saws generally are not abused half as much 
as the solid, and I have had many to ask why, in 
the same hands, this is plainly seen. With the 
solid saw running bad, what is done? Cannot 
stop and file, as saw has just been filed and 
swaged. That would not help the case. What 
is done in many cases ? Saw is cooled off" with 
water dashed on it, which only adds to its ruin. 
The inserted is not treated so. Why ? Because 
swager knows that it will run with sharp teeth, 
and stops and puts them in. The filer might stop 
and file the solid, but only to make it worse. 
There are plenty of men running saws who know 
practically nothing about them. This is not say- 
ing anything against them, as it certainly could not 
be expected that all men could be experts. The 
inserted tooth for edger saws in large mills is be- 
coming a favorite and gives good results, and 
maintains another important item, viz. : attains 
their size. Inserted teeth saws of reputable makes 
maintain their tension for a long while because the 
teeth and rings are milled to a gauge, the rim is 
not stretched more in one place than another by 
teeth not exactly the same size. If rivets or keys 



86 



are used a very light blow, giving all an equal 
strain. Such saws are hammered as the solid, but 
with less tension, as centrifugal force does not act 
as much on them. 



8HINQLE 8AW8. HOW TO FILE, GUM AND HAM- 
MER. A GREAT 8AVING IN POWER AND 
TIMBER DEMON8TRATED. 

Shingle saws generally require but little tension- 
ing. They often get "spalted,'' and in such cases 
the rim can be brought true on the block without 
removing from the collar, always applying the 
straightedge on the upper side. It should then show 
a high place to be on the collar side. Considerable 
light will be seen under straightedge. For level- 
ing the rim, use a short straightedge. Then use 
a long one clear across the saw to see if center is a 
little lower than the rim, say one thirty-second 
inch for hand machines and single cutters; but 
double cutters, or ** blockers," require the rim to be 
about one-sixteenth higher than center. Straighten 
the saw as previously treated on large circulars, 
but using only a **tap" of a blow as compared to a 
thicker saw, or you will make saw worse. Exam- 
ine closely for short twisted places, as described, 
and remove them with straight peine light ham- 
mer. If saw, after truing the rim and the center, 
should show to be a little higher, loosen the 



87 

screws on outer edge of collar and insert, say one 
thickness of heavy writing paper, or more if neces- 
sary, uniform around the collar and screw down 
tightly. Should rim not revolve true, insert more 
paper at lowest place, or withdraw some at the 
highest place. What is wanted is a true rim, 
which can be easily had after removing the crooks 
or lumps between rim and collar. A shingle saw 
is too delicate for any but a few to attempt to ham- 
mer, because their heavy blows quickly get the 
saw worse. While machine is running slowly, the 
uneven places on the rim can be marked by hold- 
ing a piece of chalk or end of broken file steady. 
The short marks indicate generally a sprung place 
which needs straightening ; the parts that are not 
marked which show some distance require^paper- 
ing. But little will raise the rim. If after getting 
rim true it may be too high — that is, saw may run 
up ,too much — if in a double cutter saw, and the 
filing will not bring it right, the center screws 
must be removed, and small segments of paper at 
regular intervals inserted. Do not take saw oflF 
collar unless compelled to, as you are liable to de- 
stroy your former work by moving the paper. It 
is not best to have a single cutting saw stand up 
too high on rim, as they will cut uneven, running 
up in hard blocks where the grain is not straight 
and cutting thick shingles in very soft blocks. 



Double block saws must be square with the 
machine in every way, that is, parallel with the 
ways. This can easily be done by measuring at 
four equal points out from the center of saw. All 
these points must measure the same, from saw to 
planed ways. All such machines have ample pro- 
vision in the arrangement of the boxes. 

TENSIONING 8HINGI.E SAWS. 

As stated, such saws require but little tension- 
ing. Very high speeded large saws sometimes 
require it. In such cases, saw must be taken oflF 
the collar and stretched on anvil lightly inside of 
screw holes. If saw is very stiflF and two lines do 
not help it sufficiently, working on both sides of 
saw, work on one line just outside of screws. 
Where saw is bright the impression of the hammer 
will show a dull spot on opposite side, which will 
serve to apply the blows opposite each other ; but if 
the saw is hit gently and a firm, solid blow, the saw 
will not be sprung. High speeded shingle saws 
require that the center be a little slack, but not to 
sag or dish. A saw that requires tensioning will 
flutter or clip shingles. If saw is suspected of 
needing tension, speed it up a little higher for a 
short duration, and if it clips and runs worse it is 
a sure indication of requiring tension. The higher 
speed expands the rim more, which of course 
makes the saw run badly, clipping the point and 
often cutting thick; but at same time, a saw too 
open will generally run down and clip, but its work 
will be more uniform. Such saws will heat near 
the center, which only makes saw that much worse. 



89 



HAMMERING SHINGLE SAW COLLARS. 

Collars often get sprung through carelessness, 
the saw always getting it first. Excessive heat 
sometimes springs a collar permanently. It is 
not generally believed that a collar can be ham* 
. mered. First apply the straightedge and locate 
the low place on the edge. Now directly oppo- 
site this place on the taper side of the collar, peine 
it with a sharp ball peine hammer. This opens 
the metal on this side, which concaves the oppo- 
site side. Collar should be flat on anvil with 
light blows, especially near edge, or it may be 
broken. A blunt center punch would almost 
answer for the purpose. There is no work at all 
done on the flat side of collar. Many ** expert" 
saw hammerers advocate this theory on saws and 
**peck" a saw from the concave side, stretching 
the steel which raises the metal lip — a nice way to 
treat a saw with its surface all cut up, with lumps 
as prominent as ever, with the tension so badly 
deranged that saw won't run. No man who ham- 
mers in this way ever knew, practically, what un- 
equal tension was in any saw. 

FILING AND GUMMING SHINGLE SAWS. 

The shingle saw also gets its portion of bad 
filing with badly shaped teeth. In many mills 
there is a loss of 25 to 40 per cent, of power from 
bad saws, and from 10 to 15 per cent, lost in saw 
kerf. This may sound astonishing, but I will 
demonstrate how 18 gauge saws can be more 
successfully run than 15 gauge. 



90 




Fig. 3 shows three styles of hand feed teeth. 
A dozen kinds might be illustrated, but A gives a 
fair average. This tooth will pull 25 per cent, 
heavier than B and will shove the operator 50 per 
cent, harder, which of course is a friction on the 
saw, losing power. C shows a tooth that might 
be overdone, too deep and slim. This tooth will 
snatch the block or spalt, and will not cut smooth 
or even shingles ; will make waves, especially in a 
hard block. Try tooth B and you will be con- 
vinced and have something that will shove easy 
and save your power. 




91 

Fig. 4 shows power feed teeth of shingle saws. 
A is the proper tooth, -ff is a power consumer. 
It will cut a fair shingle for a short while, then it 
will be calling for all there is in the engine of 
continually pulling belts in two. This tooth when 
a little dull, say after one and one-half hours' run, 
will make bad shingles. Such a tooth requires 
unnecessary set. It might be called a fair average 
tooth for many mills. C is a better tooth, as it is 
not quite so thick and has a little more pitch. C 
will tremble, which makes a rough shingle when 
filer was particular in having an even set. It has 
no free circulation for dust and will often jamb and 
have to be cleaned. A is the tooth that can be 
relied upon every time and in all kinds of timber. 
It is short, has more dust room than B and C, and 
will cut a smooth shingle. A will run with less 
set than the latter. In gumming shingle saws 
the back should be kept straight for power feed 
and with less pitch. Hand feed will stand more 
pitch with a little rounding back, as described. 
Care must be taken not to case-harden or to leave 
any on the teeth. It will strip your file and snap 
teeth oflF when setting. 

LINING SHINGLE 8AW8. 

Double block saws are square, that is, of same 
distance on each side from the bottom of planed 
ways. Hand feed and rotary machine saws require 
a trifle lead in the mandrel, also a little in the saw, 
as indicated. Too much lead in the saw is bad in 
cutting broad blocks. Narrow blocks do not show 
it so much. For hand machines the same or a 



Uttle more lead. Such saws may be flat. I have 
$een them a little high in center do very good work. 
Nothing like this would do in power machines 
where they are crowded for all they are worth. 

THIN 8AW8 AND HOW 80ME MILLS MAY SAVE 
THOUSANDS OF DOLLARS ANNUALLY. 

This is a fact which I can plainly demonstrate, 
the satisfaction being got in testing it. Take the 
average of saws run on Challenor's or Perkins' 
double blockers. They are fourteen or fifteen 
gauge with eighty and ninety teeth, filed about like 
tooth B^ Fig. 4. Now, such machines will run 
lighter, better, be lighter on belts and power, if a 
seventeen gauge saw with one hundred and ten 
teeth for 36" saws and one hundred and twenty 
for 38" saws, filed like tooth A^ Fig. 4. The prin- 
cipal feature comes in the saving of timber. This 
may sound like folly, but ** figures won't lie." 
Make the calculation a fourteen gauge saw will 
not run with less than one-eighth inch set, with 
but eighty to ninety teeth. Why? Because so 
few corners to do the work they soon get dull, not 
from cutting, but from friction. The standard 
sixteen inch shingle measures precisely one-quar- 
ter inch in center, saw kerf making three-eighths 
inch. To make a shingle with blocks averaging 
fifteen inches high, makes forty shingles. A sev- 
enteen gauge saw will run with three thirty- 
second inch scant set. This is giving within a 
fraction as much set as the fourteen gauge. When 
it will run with much less set in the same block, 
this saw will make 44 shingles against 40, a saving 



98 

often per cent., which is ten thousand shingles 
saved in a day's run of one hundred thousand. 
To cut these figures in half makes a saving to mill 
men of $io to $12 a day. The above is no experi- 
ment. I can produce evidence that I have run 
eighteen gauge saws on double cutters, making 
first-class shingles, and nineteen gauge on rotary 
cutters. Now, this is a consideration which should 
interest any mill-man's pocket. Now understand 
me that as I reduce the gauge of saw I add more 
teeth, a seventeen gauge saw with eighty to ninety 
teeth would not run at all. Why? The teeth 
being so thin would spring, which could not be 
helped. Thin saw condemned right there. I have 
seen many men make similar changes for the 
worse. There must not be less teeth than what I 
have stated. Some may advocate more power, 
which is not so. The thin saw calls for less power 
and will stand up longer, which with a great gain 
in shingles ought to be considered. 

In many mills we see fifteen gauge seventy 
and eighty teeth hand machine saws. What are 
they doing? Changing saws six times a day for 
forty thousand shingles. I once put an eighteen 
gauge one hundred and twenty tooth saw beside 
one of these saws. To the surprise of all except 
myself, it ran lighter and stood up its quarter. A 
shingle saw does not take wood as a board saw 
and a great number of teeth will not cut a pow- 
dered dust to heat the saw, but each tooth will cut 
a shaving. More corners to resist the friction wear 
make the saw stand up, if saws are filed as I rec- 
ommend, no trouble will be had with running 



94 



thin saws. Apply my tooth to your present saws 
and note resultSj which will indicate whether my 
theory is right. 



n 



B 




^i3^5 





FILING AND SETTING SHINGLE SAW TEETH. 

C shows edge view of tooth B in Fig, 4. 
Notice how the corner is worn. This tooth will 
require more power to drive it than B. While A 
will yet run lighter ; will not make quite as smooth 
a shingle as B^ but will cut true and even. D 
shows a double spread. This tooth is advocated 
by some. I do not recommend it unless on saws 
of fifty to sixty teeth, as are occasionally found. 
Shingle saw teeth must be swaged a little occasion- 
ally and not when too dull. Some will ridicule 
this idea. If they prefer jointing C down one- 
eighth inch nearly and gum out again rather than 
swage the point it is a good thing for saw-makers. 



CUT-OFF SAWS. 

Such saws generally receive but little attention 
among saw, planing and shingle mills. As a re- 
sult of this, there are many such saws broken. 
The front of teeth should be filed perfectly square 
unless teeth are very fine ; then a hand saw tooth 
must be given. 



95 




I shows tooth in general use with teeth straight 
to the center. I have seen such saws when dull 
changed around to cut from the other side. This 
tooth will not run with any satisfaction in a deep 
cut, as the beveling front to tooth will pass the 
dust jamb and heat the saw, especially in dry, hard 
wood. A shows a much better tooth ; it having a 
square throat, will carry its dust out freely. This 
tooth has some pitch, as shown by dotted lines. 
B is the tooth for all purposes, places and kinds of 
wood. If the reade.r will only try it he will be 
wonderfully convinced. This tooth possesses many 
valuable points. First, it will run with less set, 
cut smoother, twice as easy, and run as long again 
without filing as tooth i. For mitre and angle 
to the grain this tooth will do the work nicely. 
For hard wood it must not be quite so slim. 
There should be plenty of teeth in a cut-oflFsaw, 
especially a swing saw. Too few teeth cause it to 



96 

jump, while plenty of teeth, say eighty to ninety 
in a fast cutting thirty-six inch saw, cannot hardly 
be made jump unless too little set. If ^ is a 
stationary saw the front of tooth may line to center 
of saw. The cut shows by dotted lines right pitch 
for swing saw. If a small swing saw with teeth 
one-half inch apart, square the front of teeth with 
a one-quarter inch emery wheel and be convinced. 
C is a man-killer. The arrow indicates the direc- 
tion of motion. This shows a tooth with an ex- 
treme bevel on front and will require considerable 
power to drive it, and if a swing saw, there is 
hardly any pulling it through at all. 

The advantage of B is that it is especially 
adapted for shingle blocks or heiavy, deep sawing. 
D shows B reversed, filed square on back and 
flemming on the front. This is about as bad a 
tooth as I to pull. Try it by reversing tooth B^ 
which will demonstrate results. I don't advo- 
cate new saws in this work, but a change in the 
present forms of teeth. Many new saws have not 
as good a tooth as is illustrated in Fig. 6. 

BROKEN CUT-OFF SAWS. 

This problem has given the saw-makers much 
thought. All know that square corners or case- 
hardened throats will crack a saw ; but to say 
nothing of this, many saws crack even from back 
of tooth instead of front. This indicates the ten- 
sion too tight on rim ; but one says, ** Not so. 
Saw is stiflF, and how can that be ? " Now, if your 
saw is to run at high speed, first stretch the rim 
close to the edge on say two lines, then saw will 



97 

be very loose or open on rim. Now open half way 
between rim and center until saw is a little open, 
then it will be safe. The checking in this case is 
due to excessive centrifugal strain from high 
speed. Such saws are tensioned as the circular 
described previously. It is useless to explain the 
many shaped teeth and their result. Filing sharp 
corners invariably results in fracture in a high 
speeded saw. Cut-off saws that get much abuse 
should be a little slack on the rim. This allows 
the saw, when jammed or bent, to yield more 
readily, whereas a stiff saw would be more liable 
to break. Swing saws in saw-mills get more or 
less abuse and should have plenty of set. 

DRAG SAWS. 

Drag saws for fast cutting with fast motion 
want peg teeth, square on both sides, and filed 
like tooth ^4, Fig. 6. Slower motion saws in large 
logs may have every fifth tooth a drag or raker. 
They are hammered as crosscut saws are. 

SMALL RIP AND VARIETY SAWS. 

Saws used in furniture, sash, door and blind 
factories and planing-mills often give a great deal 
of trouble. Hammering such saws is precisely on 
the principle already treated, with the exception 
that small saws are kept stiff, with the exception 
of high speeded resaws. When such saws require 
tensioning in the ordinary manner, great care 
should be exercised to strike very light blows. 
Bench saws often show blue spots, which can be 
easily straightened back on the block. If they 
appear again, stretch the rim opposite such a place 



98 

gently on both sides of the saw. This may make 
the rim too weak, causing it to heat and snake. 
If so, the center, except the blue spot, should be 
opened a little. The fence on such saws is often 
wrong and extends over the edge of the saw, which 
soon dishes the saw, and shows up one or more 
blue spots. The back edge of gauge should stand 
a trifle farther than the front edge from saw. If 
the front side should be farthest, the work acts as a 
wedge, pressing heavy against center of saw. In 
testing a dished saw, the center should be pressed 
down straight ; then it will show whether it is 
sprung just outside of the collars, or on a line of 



top of table. If saw gets too long on rim it will 
snake and should have the same treatment as given 
larger saws. Resaws, owing to their taper, are 
very difEcult to get true. Some use graduated or 
concave straightedges, which must be applied pre- 
cisely the same way every time. If center can be 
forced in while testing with straightedge will help 
in locating lumps. They should be opened near 



99 



the center, owing to the friction that such saws 
are exposed to, which is generally halfway between 
center and rim. If such saws were ground concave 
from rim to center they would run much better. 
The present method they are convex and sometimes 
straight. Small saws that are dished and many 
taper resaws can be readily hammered by resting 
saw on edge of rest, as shown in Fig. 4. With 
straightedge in hand, with pressure downward to 
bring saw straight, the lumps can easily be located. 
If saw was badly dished and hus no blue spots it 
will show a high ridge at A A^ which is just out- 
side of collar or above table line. When saw is 
pressed straight its true defect is located. The 
filing of such saws is by far the most important. 




Fi^, 7. 



Fig. 7 shows various teeth for resaws, such as 
are in general use. A^ B and C are resaw as well 
a3 rip teeth. D shows a modified form, which 
requires no explanation. A and C are considered 
perfect teeth by the majority of filers. ^4 is a very 
fair tooth. C is a bad tooth and will make a bad 



100 

running saw in hard wood. B is the best tooth 
for resaws. If the reader has any trouble with 
resaw and will apply tooth j5, set as at £", saw will 
go if everything about the machine is near right. 
To swage such teeth helps them ; in fact, all rip 
saw teeth that are sufficiently spaced should be 
swaged a little or they will become as F^ requiring 
more power, hence more strain on saw, causing it 
to dodge, saying nothing of such a tooth tending to 
keep with the grain. Thin resaws can be easily run 
by keeping the backs of teeth down. Few realize 
the pressure against a saw with too high a back. 
Straight back with short teeth is just what is 
wanted. Resaws, as well as all others, can be 
leaded a little with the file, but should not be 
practiced longer than the first opportunity to 
thoroughly line machine and straighten or tension 
saw as needed. Give bench saws plenty of set 
and pitch. 

MISCBLLANBO VS. 

HOT SAWS. WHAT HEATS A SAW ON THE RIM. 

Mandrel out of line, with too much lead to 
mandrel in saw, or filing:, unequal tension, caus- 
ing a saw to run unsteady between guides. Too 
many teeth is another serious cause ; having not 
enough set ; too small a throat to chamber dust 
and too high a back. Too much set will some- 
times heat a saw on rim. Saw not open enough 
for speed in its tension ; too open, or large, a 
throat in sawing hard wood, which is the case 
with many inserted toothed saws. 



101 



WHAT HEATS A SAW IN THE CENTER. 

Teeth not having enough set ; saw too thick 
in center; lined too much out of the log; back of 
teeth too high will heat a saw in center as well as 
rim ; too slow speed, causing saw to run from log 
and heating center. A hot mandrel, though it 
may not impart much heat to the saw, will cause 
a new saw to run from the log and heat in center. 
All this is based from a saw in good, that is, 
hammered to proper speed. Carriage and track 
out of line will heat a saw at center, the rim 
accommodating the vibration when center cannot. 
If track and carriage is not in perfect, run a little 
end-play in mandrel. A saw with a blue spot or 
full place near the eye will cause it to heat. A 
saw badly out of round will heat on rim. 

LINING SAW WITH THE CARRIAGE. 

A perfect saw on a good mill requires but little 
lead — just sufficient to clear the set in gigging. 
The ordinary rule is to give a saw one-eighth inch 
in twenty feet. The reader may plainly under- 
stand this method of lining. First run back block 
up to center of saw ; force all the end-play in man- 
drel and carriage one way ; measure the distance 
to saw; then back this block twenty feet, which is 
in front of the saw; draw a fine line just one- 
eighth closer to end of head block than the dis- 
tance measured from saw ; now move mandrel 
until line from center of saw will just touch or show 
the same opening from rim to edge. 

There are many reasons why this method is 
not correct. First, few saws are true, and if not, 



102 

the measurement is not certain. Though every 
saw-maker advocates this method, I will advance 
a way which is not governed by the saw or from 
any measurements from it. Run front block up 
to the collar; saw being off, force the end motion 
in carriage and mandrel apart; then measure pre- 
cisely 2" from face of collar and make a fine mark 
on face of head block, run the next block up and 
measure just the same. Now move carriage until 
both blocks will be about equally from the man- 
drel ; remove saw guide, bore a 2" hole in a piece 
of 1x3, three and one-half feet long or about ; bore 
holes for lug pins, and screw it up tight on man- 
drel ; drive a pointed nail through the end of piece 
to just touch the line; then move mandrel one- 
half over and measure the other side ; move man- 
drel until the front edge shows a trifle closer to 
line; if mandrel and saw are right, then it will 
have the proper lead. 

TRUING A SAW ON ITS MANDREL. 

This I do not on general principles advocate, 
as the hammer is the best-known method of truing 
a saw. However, many may prefer this, having 
not the time and tools to hammer with. Not one- 
half of the saw mandrels are true. Then what 
must be done with the new saw if it does not screw 
up true? 

Mr. J. E. Emerson recommends springing the 
plate by pulling it over. I have straightened 
slightly dished saws by pulling them over, having 
first heated the saw by friction on the concave 
side. A dished saw may be papered and brought 



103 

true and run just as well. If saw leans from the 
log, put a ring of paper size of collar, one-half inch 
wide, onto the fast collar, put saw on and add 
several small rings to come just inside, or cut out 
a nick for lug pins. If loose collar is much con- 
caved it will require several pieces of heavy paper. 
If saw is concave on log side reverse the paper. 
Sometimes a crook can be brought in much better 
shape by inserting segments of paper between saw 
and collar opposite the full side of untrue place. 
This can only be limited, but may be tested as 
often as may be desired, when saw is dished and 
an attempt is made to spring it straight. It should 
be laid off so that all the pulls will be normal, or 
miscellaneous pulling would spring the saw untrue. 

TURNING UP SAW COLLAR. 

This is something that every filer should un- 
derstand. This can be done right in the mill 
where it runs if a little precaution is taken. First 
rig a perfectly steady iron rest, the top of which 
should be to center (one-half way the collar) with 
lug pins removed. Force all end motion one way 
with a thrust, then with a diamond point and 
square nose tool the operation is ready. The 
tools should be made of not less than five-eighths 
steel, with a long convenient handle, to hold per- 
fectly steady. Run mandrel from sixty to seventy- 
five turns per minute and scrape oflf the imperfec- 
tions, but by no means gouge in or attempt to take 
a cut. Scrape oflf and leave edge perfectly flat for 
say five-eighths, then a slight concave. Care must 
be used not to catch tool in pin holes directly at 



104 

the stem. Care should be exercised not to leave 
it full. A very trifling thing will change a saw at 
the collars. After collar is scraped perfectly true 
put on the loose collar with face out; turn edge 
perfectly flat, say three-quarters inch, just so the 
remainder of the collar does not touch the saw and 
does not show over one sixty-fourth of an inch. 
Turn off* the collar until the nut interferes, then 
the center should be scraped off". All loose motion 
must be out of bearings or the tool will not work 
well, but will chatter. 

THE SAW MANDREL. 

It is very essential that it be perfect. No saw 
can be run successfully with an imperfect, out-of- 
line mandrel. Where it is possible, three bearings 
should be used ; and if pulley is overhung, the 
belt should be run as slack as possible with a good 
lap. Heavy mills are not built in this way. The 
bearings should be long and be self-oiling ; but 
this is not always the case, and the present man- 
drel is what the reader should remedy. It should 
be level, with pulleys well balanced. Often the 
key will tilt a pulley and throw it out of balance. 
If mandrel is set on two sharp straightedges and 
leveled, its heavy side can be easily detected, and 
should be counteracted by adding weight on the 
light side. Long mandrels are objectionable and 
require more power. Heat in a long mandrel will 
make it longer and will throw the lead out of saw 
if collars are on outer end, as they generally are. 
Saw collars should be as large as possible. The 
average collar is about five and one-half inches 



105 

when it should be six and one-half. A 64" saw 
should have 7" collar, while a 5", as we sometimes 
see, will not stiflFen such a saw to stand as much 
as one-half the feed. This is a fact; besides, 
small collars dish and are more liable to crack the 
saw at center, just outside of collar. For satisfac- 
tory results, driving belt and pulley should be as 
large as possible. If saws had driving pulley 
one-half their diameter and well balanced, there 
would be no trouble with slipping belts, with 
a twenty-five per cent, increase in the output of 
the mill. 

A HOT SAW MANDREL. 

This is a great annoyance, delay and injury to 
saws. There are numerous causes for a mandrel 
to heat, to say nothing of the many times they heat 
from unaccountable causes. Mandrels for log saws 
are often heated from grit from the log. Boxes 
should be protected in this way as much as possi- 
ble. Cheap and dirty oil is another cause. Man- 
drels that heat are often out of round a little, or 
soon wear so. Steel is much better than iron and 
will wear better, yet it will not remain so in wear- 
ing. Common babbitt is another cause. Anything 
used that will melt and fill the ladle is too often 
used. Instead of ordering the very best metal, 
heat to a low heat that will just pour, and with 
mandrel and boxes warm a good job will be the 
result. Then redlead the mandrel, place it back, 
revolve it, then scrape until a perfect free fit is had 
with ample oil flutes cut. A mandrel that heats 
will be often improved by taking it up and scraping 
boxes out clean. Changing the lead without loos- 



106 

ening up bolts often causes heat. The mandrel 
should be level and in line. Hollow mandrels are 
coming in use and are the best. A slow stream of 
water can be fed onto the saw, which is not bad on 
a saw. Care and good lubricants are about the 
best remedies. A compound of plumbago and 
sulphur in good oil, well mixed and applied, will 
help. Clean tallow is good. A mixture of soda in 
good oil has been known to stop mandrels when 
all other remedies fail ; but the same application 
will not work every time, and what cures at one 
time seems to help but little at other times on the 
same mandrel, showing the necessity of experiment- 
ing until the right lubricants are used. New 
boxes and mandrels often heat for a few days. 
Heat in a mandrel has ruined many a new saw by 
dishing it. Many mandrels heat continually, and 
this is often omitted in ordering saws. Why? 
Because the heat does not bother the old saw and 
is not considered an item. I must say saw-makers 
are not close enough in that respect. A springy 
mandrel will heat. The majority of mandrels are 
too small, and bearing next to saw should be 
turned down nearly one-quarter inch. This re- 
duces friction. The back end near drive pulley 
should not be turned quite so much to prevent 
springing. Any mandrel can stand to be one- 
quarter inch less at bearings, which will help very 
much. Too light and too tight a belt is another 
great cause. Belt should be protected from dust, 
so that an elastic or cohesive surface can be given 
belt. A little castor-oil will stick well, but a very 
little at a time should be used. 



107 

MILL BUILDLSGS.—BOW TO BUILD. 



This is a ver>' important consideration with the 
mill-man, especially with the successful man. No 
man ever built a mill to his exact liking, there 
being more or less changes necessary' to produce 
more and cheaper lumber. No one man ever knew 
all about building mills, but by ha\nng the opinions 
of others a man is often led into convenient ideas. 

SMALL AND PORTABLE MILLS. 

Such mills should consist of a single circular, 
if small timber, and a top saw if necessary, should 
consist of swing cut-oflF saw and log turner. With 
this machinery four men, outside of the sawyer, 
can cut from four to five thousand feet of good 
marketable lumber. Such mills should be set on 
a hill-side, if possible, parallel with same, so that 
logs can be received from the side of the mill and 
dropped as near as possible to carriage. Engine 
should be of high speed of a reputable make and 
run with a governor, making the work lighter on 
engine and machinery. A long, heavy saw man- 
drel should be used with at least three bearings. 
This gives space for stacking rough edge and 
allows lumber truck or car to come right up to the 
saw. The log turner can be driven from the saw 
mandrel by a quarter twist belt. The swing cut- 
oflf saw may be run from this shaft by extending 
it, but it is preferable to drive it from engine shaft 
and put it back from the saw at least five feet far- 
ther than the longest stuflF that is to be sawed. 



108 

Then carriage is not shoving against it and break- 
ing saws. With the sawyer's set lever, he and the 
man who rolls down logs can easily turn logs; one 
man behind the saw and one at the swing saw to 
trim, cut up slabs and take out lumber. With 
lumber car right up to saw, the man behind the 
saw loads this car as the lumber comes from the 
saw, the swing saw man cutting up the accumula- 
tion of slabs, etc., collected while he was taking 
car out. The track should be ironed and the car 
light with large wheels. The mill should have 
ample room. When edging up the rough edge 
(which is done on the carriage), the log man helps, 
and so everything progresses well for five thousand 
feet per day. Without the swing saw, lumber goes 
out in bad shape, not trimmed. An extra man is 
required to cut up refuse. Many mills use no log 
turner, necessitating an extra man, besides a de- 
crease in the output of the mill. The sawdust 
should be carried out on a conveyor, which can be 
cheaply built from 4" to 6" cotton belting with 
cleats on the outside every five feet, and run at 
not over one hundred and fifty feet per minute. 
Small mills usually use fire-box boilers, which will 
not burn dust well; besides, the dust can be 
handled much cheaper than slabs. In arranging 
a mill of this kind for sawing long lengths all the 
posts of the mill should be on the other side of 
carriage, directly in center of mill, one being at the 
end of mill, the other not near enough the sawyer 
to interfere with turning logs. On these posts 
should be a heavy cap, then projecting joists, 
heavy enough not to sag. The posts on the out- 



109 

side of mill should be anchored, or set, deep in the 
•ground, with joist well secure. This allows all 
clear in front of carriage, with no posts or suspen- 
sions. The posts and joists form a cross, the long 
end of **T" receiving the outside posts set far 
eiiough back that the suspended end will not sag. 
This is by far the cheapest plan, as it requires nice 
framing to put in a span, besides having to use 
heavy timber. The utmost care should be exer- 
cised to have good, solid foundations for machinery, 
and put in perfect line. This is essential in 
erecting any machinery. 

MILLS OF MEDIUM CAPACITY. 

Such mills may be set end to hill-side, es- 
pecially if to cut bills on short notice, logs being 
brought in on a car, the track can be extended, 
allowing access to length and quality of logs on 
either side car. Track should be lowered sufficient 
to allow logs to roll on free. If logs are to be re- 
ceived from water or from an incline, a **bull" rig 
is necessary. But little space should be between 
car and carriage, and this on some incline. All 
the machinery except saws should be on the first 
floor. In a mill of ten to fifteen thousand feet per 
day a light four saw gang edger should be used 
and set a good distance from the main saw, but 
within two or three feet of main rolls. This allows 
edging long stuff", and when edger should be idle 
from any cause, some space is had for piling edg- 
ing. Swing saw on main line rolls should be 
directly opposite the discharge from the edger, 
then the edgings and lumber to be trimmed can 



110 

be easily transferred. Lumber is received directly 
from edger on car or trucks, as well as from main* 
rolls. A slight incline should be on the other side 
of rolls for bill stuflF. If straight boilers are used, 
the furnace should be at front end, directly oppo- 
site the saw, so that a conveyor can be used run- 
ning directly over top of boilers and discharging 
dust through iron spouts into furnace. Slabs may 
be sold for wood or taken out on a light car to a 
burner or in safe place to burn. In this mill seven 
men besides the sawyer should cut ten to twelve 
thousand feet per day. Two or three live rolls 
can easily be U3ed, driven by a 4" belt with a 
depth turned in the roller ; such rollers arranged 
on a pivot frame drop down when not needed. 
They are indispensable in getting out heavy tim- 
ber with but few men. Such a mill, if on a port- 
able order, need not have heavy upper framing, 
but lighter, and built on the lower frame. If a 
planer and dry-house are required and to be driven 
from the same engine, would advise the planer 
direct on ground floor ; if room under the mill, on 
the same side of mill that landing or switch is. 

Dry-house should be on the other side of mill 
if convenient, and may be of the smoke-kiln style, 
wh ch is cheap and not expensive to run, as the 
surplus slabs will make the fuel. Lumber for 
kiln should be taken on lumber trucks, while a 
light car and track should lead from kiln to planer. 
Every mill should have a dry-kiln and planer. The 
kiln will dry the stock, be dressed and paid for 
long before air drying sets in. Most every one is 
familiar with the old style smoke-kiln. The lum- 



Ill 

ber is stacked some distance from the ground, with 
'a long, deep trench under each pile for receiving 
the fire. The portable roof and end being placed 
in, a slow fire is kept up. A wire gauge or screen 
is often stretched between fire and lumber to pre- 
vent sparks from igniting. One man can take care 
of one-half dozen of these kilns, which will dry 
four to five thousand feet per day. The track to 
planer should run parallel with kilns, which often 
requires a turn-table before reaching planer con- 
veniently. If mill is built on the ground, planer 
may be set behind, the carriage track parallel with 
same, with counter-shaft from engine overhead. 
All planers should have a good exhaust fan for 
conveying shavings either to furnace or to a 
burner. It is the best plan to have planing-mill 
separate, driven by separate engine; but there are 
many small mills which cannot afford this extra 
outlay for a small amount of dressing. 

MODERN MILLS OF GREATER CAPACITY^ 

In building such mills, every precaution should 
be taken for convenience and cheapness of manu- 
facture. One defect or badly arranged machine or 
part of machine will throw a fast mill out of ten 
thousand feet per day. 

The arrangement of boiler and engine need not 
be discussed farther than that they should be de- 
tached from the saw-mill, and in a fire-proof build- 
ing; then the burning of the saw-mill will save 
engine and boilers. Logs should be delivered to 
mill by an endless chain with toothed dogs for 
hauling up logs. • An endless cable with car may 



112 

be used with a friction grip. This allows car to 
be moved at will, while cable runs continuously. 
Automatic stops are often placed in log deck, by 
which logs stop themselves; then with a steam 
"wench" they are delivered to steam stop and 
roller, from which the steam nigger places on the 
carriage and is ready for sawing. Edger should 
be placed a good distance from main saw and as 
close to main rolls as possible, leaving about two 
feet. Live rolls should be from seventy-five to one 
hundred and fifty feet long, and in from two to 
three sections, each section speeded faster nearer 
end of run. Nothing but bill lumber should pass 
edger. Everything, as near as possible, should go 
through edger, then to trimmer, assorted and 
carried to destination on conveyors or lumber 
trucks. An edging cutter should be placed aft the 
edger next to live rolls, delivering same into a 
conveyor that should run the whole length under 
the mill. This could deliver, if necessary, into a 
cross conveyor to burner. In the second section 
of live rolls should be a blind saw for cutting long 
rough edges or sidings. This section should have 
independent rolls, reversible, then the edger could 
take care of all long or medium stuff". Sawdust 
conveyors should run parallel with trimmer, taking 
dust from same and from the edger, delivering in- 
to burner or to conveyor to furnace. Conveyors 
should be so arranged as to keep mill clean. This 
is too often overlooked, and the result is, mill and 
premises are soon blockaded with trash. For con- 
venience and cheapness, everything should go di- 
rectly out from main saw. Handling lumber side- 



118 

ways in a mill does not pay. Some mills are 
arranged with a steam transfer to edger, edgers 
being set far enough from main rolls that trimmer 
may be placed between it and main rolls, with a 
lumber conveyor running parallel with rolls. All 
lumber from trimmer and main saws for stock or 
kiln go out by this conveyor. Bill stuff is dumped 
from rolls at the desired place by means of friction 
canters. Bill lumber from edger instead of dump- 
ing into conveyor is passed over to main rolls, 
then out. This style of mill is coming into gene- 
ral use, requiring but few men to handle an out-put 
of seventy-five to one hundred thousand feet per 
day of heavy lumber. Double circular and gang 
mills have gang placed from fifty to seventy-five 
feet from saws, with steam canters and transfers 
by which every cant is placed direct on rolls in 
front of gang without a hand touching it. These 
remarks are to form but an idea of the arrangement 
of mills. It will pay anyone contemplating erect- 
ing a mill of expense and of modern capacity to 
travel around and see what is going on. No two 
mills can hardly be found built alike. Many good 
mill-men pay their profits out in expensive manu- 
facture. The idea is to arrange to save labor by 
doing the work with good, well-arranged machin- 
ery. Saw-mill machinery should be much heavier, 
that is, of greater capacity than intended; then 
breakdowns and worn-out machinery will be 
avoided. Heavy shafting, with light, broad-faced, 
well-balanced pulleys and heavy, broad belts 
should be used, but not too long. If possible, 
avoid tighteners. Good, broad belts, after stretch- 



114 

ing, will do their work without rattling tighteners 
to sooner or later automatically shift belt and ruin 
one edge. An erroneous idea among many is to 
have heavy, large-diameter pulleys to deliver to 
machines ** getting speed.*' This is a mistake. 
The driving pulley should not be more than two- 
thirds larger than driven, else there will be but 
little belt contact. As stated, a high speed engine 
(if not the Corliss type) should be used, and every 
pulley from it to the machine be as light as possi- 
ble. Belts in saw-mills suffer great abuse from 
dust, it being almost impossible to prevent it. 
Dust chafes the rubber from rubber belts, besides 
causing them to slip. Endless leather belts are 
preferable, but must be of an extra quality to give 
satisfaction. Poor belting is the worst element to 
a saw-mill. The successful mill-man, that is, he 
who has started with little and come up to the 
modern mill, spares no pains in selecting the very 
best machinery of ample capacity, set on good 
foundations, with heavy mill frame. Vibration to 
machinery remains only a question of time to ruin 
it. Any unbalanced pulley should at once be 
balanced, or a new one replaced. True, smooth, 
heavy and well-lined shafting, with bearings pro- 
tected from dust, will run for years with but little 
wear or attention, farther than prompt oiling. 
Light shafting with unbalanced pulleys, narrow, 
tight belts, are : First, hot bearings, shaft getting 
out of line, eventually a broken shaft, to say 
nothing of continual annoyance. Put in the best. 



HOW TO SAW CHOICE LOGS TO BEST 
ADVANTAGE. 



WHAT CAUSES SPRINGY LUMBER. 

Sawing a log to best advantage is a very important 
item in any mill. More lumber is saved in this way 
than in all the thin saw theories. Among fast mills 
with small logs but little, if any, time can 1>e consumed 
in setting, log quantity being the aim. In the average 
and small mills much can be saved in quality and 
quantity of lumber. It is no common thing to see 
joists and square stuff badly sprung from defective 
setting of the log. No log should be sawed directly 
through the heart, as the lumber will spring. The 
heart should be enclosed, which is done by sawing all 
around it. The heart, or center, of no log looks well ; 
so in sawing inch stuff the heart should be left as near 
as possible in the center of a 2" or 3" piece, as neces- 
sary, which encloses a defect in appearance. This is 
the only way to saw oak. In sawing oak do not saw. 
past the heart, as it will spring badly. Straight trees 
in pine, hemlock and large cypress, spring but little, 
unle.ss the heart is on one side of the center, and log 
is oblong, not round. This indicates a leaning tree. 
The underside will pinch a saw and spring badly. 
This side al^yays shows a much coarser and darker 
grain. The saw should cut parallel with such defects. 




116 

Fig. 8 shows reckless setting of a knotty log. 
Almost every board will be more or less affected. 
Had it been turned on carriage with knots parallel 
with saw, lumber would have been fifty per cent, bet- 
ter, as the center piece would have taken in the knots, 
making one or two merchantable boards. Often clear 
logs have but one or two knots, as at 8. Care should 
be taken to set log right if clear lumber is worth any- 
thing. 6 shows reckless setting against a defect, 
nearly all the ten boards shown being defective. 
Though if split but little, are defective for two feet, 
which alone is a considerable loss in clear lumber, to 
say nothing of the shake extending from end to end 
as in many logs. 7 shows how log should have been 
set. Oak logs should be sawed as soon as cut, or they 
will check badly. Painting the ends with a heavy 
coat of red or white lead will prevent season checks. 
In white oak the best second growth timber, which is 
decidedly the most valuable, is more susceptible of 
checks and springings after being sawed, which in 
small, young trees can hardl}' be avoided. Such lum- 
ber must be put on sticks right SLway. If allowed to 
season in a crooked state, only steaming will bring it 
back. In sawing choice, broad lumber, it slu.uld be 
all edged on the edger, the log set with its best sides 
to come parallel with the saw, either from the first 
sawing or after being turned down. If 7 was a clear 
log for broad boards it should be set so as to saw it 
parallel with the crack, sawing half way, then turning 
to the knees and leaving a one or two inch piece, as 
desired. 8 illustrates a log with considerable clear 
lumber had it been sawed the other way, that is, paral- 
lel with the knots. It is common to find one or two 
large knots on large logs, especially near the top of 
the tree. Pine and all its species have the knots ex- 
tending clear to the heart; not bumps or snarls which 



IIT 

will be sawed out in one or two boards after the slab. 
Such places must not be considered as knots. Knots 
are where a limb was once, and can generally be easily 
detected. Oak is of a different nature, and all defects 
that show on outside generally get worse near the 
center. 

SAWING CROOKED LOGS. 
It is not generally known that straight lumber can 
be sawed from a crooked log : but it is a fact. Car- 
penters often have much trouble with sprung scantling 
and joists, due principally to defective or reckless set- 
ting of crooked logs or logs from a leaning tree. The 
latter are often straight logs but make springy lumber. 




IJ 



2 
Ft«. 2. 

No log is so crooked that it has not two sides much 
straighter. If scantling are to be made from a crooked 
log on an edger, it should be set on the carriage so 
that the edger saws will take the stuff the straightest 
way of the log, and not as shown at i, Fig. 2, which 



118 



shows the stuff cut the crooked way. 2 shows the 
shape the scantling will assume in many cases. They 
will " bow," pinching and heating the saws. A^ B 
and C show considerable waste of timber. If log is to 
be turned but once, and that to the knee, sawing half 
way, it should be set with the bow, or belly, to the 
saw or to the knee, which is about the only way a 
crooked log could be set ; then the boards or scant- 
ling, as may be, will come out straight sawed and not 
spring from the edges. If scantling are to be cut on 
the big saw, the same precaution is necessary. 3 
shows what many mechanics have to do to straighten 
studding and badly sprung joists and rafters to make 
a neat job. It shows the concave side sawed into and 
wedged open to straighten. The smaller the stuff is 
cut from a crooked log, the more it is liable to spring. 
Two or three by twelve and inch plank come out 
generally straight ; but if calculated for resawing on 
the edger into three, four or six-inch strips care 
must be exercised as stated. 




Fie:. 3. 

Fig. 3. 5 shows a crooked log dimensioned on 
the big saw for 4 or 6-inch stuff. This log shows to 
be " fletched " or ripped precisely as at i in Fig. 2. 
This log will pinch the saw badly and cause it to run 
a little crooked ; but more often it is the timber sprung 



U9 

before the saw gets through. A shows the first line 
run true. The next line, between B and C, is badly 
sprung, showing to be much wider at B and narrower 
at C, with ends at D and E of proper width. All 
sawyers have noticed in ripping a crooked log that 
the second line is generally the worst, while the first 
line pinches worse. As stated, a log from a leaning 
tree can be easily detected, that is, when the heart is 
much from the center. If deals are to be sawed for 
the edger, the log should be set so that the stuff" will 
be cut parallel with the oblong side of the log. In 
other words, the heart should be set nearest the saw 
or to the knee, sawing the deals off" while in this 
position. If log is attempted to be ripped in this way 
on big saw, the big side that shows the coarsest grain 
will pinch badly. Some logs will pinch and lumber 
be a little crooked when sawed by the above instruc- 
tions, but seldom. The plan is laid down. Any man 
can convince himself on but one crooked log. 

QUARTER-SAWING. 

Quarter-sawing, which is sawing the log as near as 
possible from bark to center, makes very valuable 
lumber as a finish and in ornamental furniture and 
cabinet work. The various kinds of oak, ash, g^m 
and sycamore are the woods principally used. For 
flooring pine is quarter-sawed, but in a different way 
from the above woods. When this lumber is in 
demand, an}^ class of mill in good order can reap the 
benefits of their logs by quarter-sawing them. The 
principal and only economical way is to first halve 
the log, as shown in cut Fig. i at i . A light slab is 
first taken off, as shown, that log may lay firm. Then 
rip it near the center, laying piece A off on skidway. 
Turn the half on the carriage down as at 2, quarter- 
ing it and using a wedge at X, so that log will not 



120 




roll, unless an under-dog is used. It is not at all 
necessary to use an under or duplex dog in cutting 
quarter stuff. Two or three size long wedges slipped 
in parallel with log, until firm to log and against 
knee. Then insert dog at top and it is held more 
firm than manj* of the awkward under-dogs will. 
This half being quartered, place it on carriage as at 3, 
sawing it up as shown. This is the only profitable 
way to quarter-saw. Some recommend sawing into 
eighths, which loses considerable time in turning and 
placing the stuif on the carriage. 




Fig. 5. 2 shows how to quarter-saw a defective 
log — very olten a log with a large knot or other defect 
on one side. This is shown in the cut, and shows how 
the log is sawed until near the center, then the 
quarters B and C are sawed as described. Line A, 
cut 2, shows that several of the boards near center are 
quarter-sawed and may be edged. Cut 3 shows 
another way of quarter-sawing oak. especially if the 
lumber from the side of log is in demand. For 
other purposes fifty per cent, of this log will be 
quarter-sawed ; and it is a good plan to saw oak in 
this way. Log will cut much better, saw run truer, 
and will turn out fifty per cent, more in quantity than 
by halving and quartering the log. A mill must have 
a gang-edger to saw through the log in this way. 

QUARTER-SAWING FLOORING. 

Quarter or edge grain flooring commands from $3 
to $5 more per thousand than the ordinary " bastard " 
sawed. Large mills have expensive machinery es- 
pecially for this purpose. The log is slabbed, one or 
two boards cut off, then a 4" piece. Log is then 



122 ■ 

turned down as in Fig. 8, a slab, one or two boards as 
shown, then another 4" piece. The log is again 
turned as shown, leaving a certain dimension in cen- 
ter which, if sawed into boards, will make several 
pieces of flooring, as at A. The 4" pieces are trans- 
ferred to a gang flooring machine. Small mills can as 
profitably saw grain flooring as mills especially ar- 
ranged for it. Many of these mills do not have a 
planer; but the rough product, thoroughly dry, will 
command good price in any market. 

Fig. 3 shows how the log is sawed through and 
through, then edged to suitable widths. The center 
of log, where defective, can be made into strips six 
inches wide and up, making good common stock. 
Sawing in this way, the log is slabbed lightly, then 
turned down and sawed as far past the center as pos- 
sible. All that part near the center will be grain 
sawed, while fully seventy-five per cent, of the log will 
be suitable for quarter flooring, there being only a 
board or two next to the slab that is "bastard" or 
parallel to the grain. 

There are many mills cutting the finest timber 
there is into an inferior quality, when they can realize 
from $1.50 to $3.00 more per thousand in the rough, 
besides increasing capacity of mill fully twenty per 
cent. 

STACKING OR PILING VALUABLE LUMBER 
TO PREVENT WARPING. 

Any kind of lumber will warp if not stacked up. 
The sooner this is done after it is sawed the better for 
the lumber. Lumber sawed on a radius, as quarter 
oak, etc., warps and shrinks less than when sawed 
parallel to the heart. Quarter-sawed oak, green ash and 
sycamore should be immediately piled. The founda- 
tion of stack should be about eighteen inches high 
and inclining about fifteen degrees, as shown in Fig. 9. 



128 




/>^ . 9- 




C^J^ 



The sticks should be one inch square and very dry, 
and sticked exactly as shown in cut, as any lumber 
should be stacked. The space between boards should 
be one inch or more for oak and stack not wide. The 
sticks are placed directly at the end; this prevents 
end checks, which are very destructive. Oak, gum, 
etc., should be sticked every 24 inches. Sticks should 
be directly over each other, or a little gaining as to 
leaning of stack. Then lumber will not be sprung as 
shown in Fig. 10, which is ruinous. Fig. 9 shows a 
stack covered. By placing the sticks at end, rain can- 
not wet and expose the ends as in Fig. 10. Fig. 10 
shows a flat covering, which has no slant, doing but 
little good. Sticks are not placed directly over each 
other, which shows the result from springing. The 
ends of lumber in Fig. 10 will check; being exposed, 
will dry quicker. If the sticks are put directly at the 
end, it is protected, besides having the weight of the 
stack as a pressure, thus preventing check. Gum 
should be sticked ever}^ 18", with g^eat care that sticks 
are directly over each other or with the incline of the 
stack as Fig. 9. Quartered lumber should be edged, 
and as stated, put on sticks immediately. 



124 

I UMBER INSPECTION. 



HOW TO GRADE AND CLASSIFY ALL KINDS 
^ FOR MARKET. 

Lumber is becoming too valuable to be sawed as 
often termed "mill run" or "log through." The good 
compensating for the bad, it not being considered that 
the good is selling almost at the price of the merchant- 
able, and that one good clear board is worth more than 
a half dozen culls. 

The most successful merchant is the man who has 
his goods well classified, having the good and the bad 
separate, and telling a man just what he is getting and 
by paying more or less he can get an article in pro- 
portion. The lumber business is conducted just that 
way with the successful competitive lumberman. No 
man can now embark in the business without sharp 
competition. I will here give the lumber and inspec- 
tion rules which are general throughout the country, 
and can be relied on : 

Inasmuch as no two pieces of lumber are exactly 
alike, it is impossible to make an arbitrary rule which 
will govern each and every piece 

A board may be perfect in all respects for a certain 
line of work, and still be imperfect for other uses 
where some particular quality is necessary. There 
are many considerations which enter into the proper 
and judicious assorting and grading of lumber which 
must be determined according to judgment and ex- 
perience which the timber or the size is applicable, 
without wasting more than one-half, are mi// cu//s. 

Pieces of lumber that have augur-holes near the 
end, should be measured for length between the holes, 
and what is so measured to be classed in its proper 
quality ; if any augur- holes in the center, as well as at 
the ends, should go into cull to be measured full. 



126 

Merchantable includes only sound lumber, free 
from rot, shake and unsound hearts ; hearts in nearly 
all varieties of lumber are to be excluded from all 
grades above culls. 

When lumber is sold as merchantable, it must be 
measured so as to make due allowance for defects. 
The rule herein given as to width and thickness is 
the standard width and thickness for merchantable 
lumber of each grade. But when some slight devia- 
tion, either in width or thickness, should occur by 
accidental manufacture, so long as it will not hinder 
the lumber from being used for the purpose for which 
it is intended, such lumber should not be reduced in 
grade on account of such .deviation. 

The wider the board the more latitude is allowed 
for defects. This remark applies generally to lengths, 
widths and thicknesses, although, as a rule, unless a 
board holds plumb to an intended thickness, it is 
measured to the next standard below. In dimension 
or bill stuff, such as joist, scantling or timber, a variance 
in thickness is almost universally allowed by dealers 
and consumers, although strict rules of inspection de- 
mand full sizes in all respects. 

Manufacture should be taken into consideration in 
all qualities, and if badly manufactured, will reduce the 
grade. This is an important item, and all lumber for 
a competitive market should be especially well sawed. 
Many men are for quantity ahead of quality. Many 
mill-men receive a higher price than the market quo- 
tation simply because they are particular as to well 
sawing and grading. Remember, it takes good, that 
is, well lined, plumb, well balanced machinery and a 
perfect saw ; then quantity and quality come together. 
The greatest drawback among small mills is for them 
to realize that their machinery is not in good order. 
They draw their observation from those who are no 



126 

better oflF than themselves. Another great drawback 
is not adhering to the market inspection and grading. 
Lumber should be sawed and classed just as the mar- 
ket wants it, and not sending such stuff as suited a 
particular party. Few mill-men know that any log 
has from two to four (as the class may be) grades of 
lumber. Often one or two boards will bring as much 
as the whole log sawed into " merchantable *' or " mill 
run." In many places the inspection and grading is 
not so close as in the following; but it will be much 
better to assume the higher degree of inspection, then 
draw down to the requirements or such as the market 
desires. In large competitive cities lumber must be 
as required : 

Inspectors of lumber are not manufacturers and 
must measure and inspect lumber as they find it, of 
full length and width (except as to wane, which must 
be measured out or inspected in a lower grade), mak- 
ing no allowance for the purpose of raising grade 
unless so instructed by the buyer and seller. 

In hardwood inspection the inspector is instructed 
to use his best judgment, based upon the rules for his 
guidance. 

The standard knot shall not exceed i % inches in 
diameter, and must be of a sound character. 

Splits are always more or less damage to a piece 
of lumber. An allowance must be made, either in 
determining the quality or quantity, according to the 
nature of the split. A split extending to exceed one 
foot will reduce it to one grade lower. 

All lumber should be sawed plump thickness. 
Thin lumber is not considered marketable, and must 
be reduced to the next standard thickness, or at least 
one grade lower on account of thinness. 

A cull which will not work one-half of its size 
without waste, is a mill cull of no recognized value. 



127 

When lumber or timber does not come up to grade 
or contract, it must be placed in the next lower grade 
named. 

Lumber sawed for specific purposes, such as axles, 
bolsters, tongues, reaches, newels, balusters, squares, 
etc., must be inspected with a view to the adaptability 
of the piece for the intended use, as, in many ca^es, it 
cannot be used for other purposes. 

In inspecting the grade of firsts and seconds, an 
undue predominance of seconds should always be 
judiciously ascertained, as the purchaser is entitled 
to the full average in grade, which must not comprise 
more than 66^3 per cent, of seconds. 

Standard lengths are always recognized as being 
12, 14 and 16 feet. Shorter than 12 and longer than 
16 feet does not come within the range of standard. 
In black walnut and cherry an exception is made, 
and 10 feet is recognized as a standard length. 
Shorter or longer than standard lengths, in all 
varieties of hardwood lumber, except in counter tops, 
are to be reduced one grade lower, unless otherwise 
agreed between buyer and seller. 

Mixed lots, containing boards, planks, flooring, 
bolsters, reaches, etc., shall be measured and inspected 
according to the rules governing the measurement and 
inspection of boards arid planks, unless otherwise 
agreed between buyer and seller. 

Flooring strips should be 4 and 6 inches in width ; 
I and I !^^ inches in thickness. Other widths and 
thicknesses shall be designated as special sizes. It 
must have one face and two edges clear. 

Common flooring strips shall be of the same size 
and general character as clear, but may have two 
small sound knots not exceeding three-fourths of an 
inch in diameter, or a small amount of wane on one 
edge which will not injure it for working to its full size. 



126 

Hickory should never be cut while the sap is rising, 
as it is then liable to powder-post, and indications of 
deterioration of this character should be carefully 
scrutinized. 

Newels from all kinds of timber must be clear and 
free from heart, to square 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 inches 
plump. The length must be 4 feet full or multiples 
thereof. 

Balusters and table legs shall be clear and square, 
2x2, 2^x2^, 3x3 and 4x4, 32 inches long. 

Newels, balusters and table legs not coming up to 
the grade of clear shall be classed as cull. 

Counter tops shall be 1 2 feet and over long, i , i ^ 
and I ^ inches thick, and must be strictly clear, not 
less than 20 inches wide. 

Clear lumber shall be 10 inches wide and over, 
free from all defects of every kind or nature. 

Bolsters must be 4 feet, 4 feet 6 inches, or multi- 
ples thereof, in length, and the size must be 3x4, 
3'^X4>^, 3>^x5 or 4x5 inches. 

Reaches must be 2x4, or 2%yi^y2 inches, and the 
lengths 8, 10, 12 and 16 feet. 

Harrow timber must be 2^^x254 inches, and the 
lengths 5, 10 and 14 feet. 

Hickory axles must clear, and in lengths of 6 or 
12 feet for sizes 3 ><x4'/^, 4x5' 4x6 and 4>^x6, and 7 
or 14 feet for 5x6 and 5x7 on special order, cut from 
sound, tough, butt logs. 

Wagon tongues must be clear and straight, 2x4 
at small end, and 4x4 at the butt end, or 23^x4)^ at 
small end and ^^x^yi at butt ends, 12 feet long, from 
tough, straight-grained timber. 

Bolsters, reaches, harrow timber, hickory axles 
and wagon tongues not up to the grade of clear will 
be classed as cull. 

Standard thickness shall be I, i''4, i>^, 2, 2>^, 3 



129 

and 4 inches, except poplar, which will allow ^ inch. 
When lumber is sold on the market to be measured 
merchantable, the inspector must measure full, except 
in culls which are to be measured at one-half. 

It is important that all lumber should be parallel 
in width, square-edged, and with square ends. Taper- 
ing lumber should be measured at the small end. Ordi- 
nary season checks are not considered defects. 

Squares shall be 4x4, 5x5, 6x6, 7x7 and 8x8 inches. 

Stains, specks, hearts, shakes, rot, wormholes, etc., 
are considered serious defects, reducing lumber to 
grades lower than firsts and seconds. 

Log-run is always understood to be the unpicked 
run of the logs — mill culls out. 

SOUTHERN OR YELLOW PINE. 

Inspection grades consist of firsts and seconds, 
common and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 8 inches wide and over 
(except flooring), free from defects except narrow 
bright sap on the face side, or two small sound knots 
not over three-fourths of an inch in diameter. 

Common shall include all lumber not up to the 
grade of firsts and seconds, but free from shakes, 
large knots, or unsound lumber. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

Firsts and seconds clear flooring and strips must 
be free from all defects except bright sap, which is 
allowable. Blue sap is excluded. 

Common flooring and strips must be of the same 
size and general character as firsts and seconds clear, 
but may have two or three small sound* knots of not 
more than three-fourths of an inch in diameter, or a 
small wane on one edge which will not injure it for 
working to its full size. 



130 

Step plank, firsts and seconds clear, must not be 
less than 12 inches wide, 1% and 2 inches thick; 
free from all defects on one side, except two inches of 
bright sap. 

Grain, riff, or edge sawed flooring is graded as fol- 
lows : Clear and firsts. 

Clear is 4 inches wide, free from all defects and 
must show three-fourths inch edge grain; that is, 
grain may vary to an angle of 45 degrees. 

Firsts will admit of one or two small, sound knots, 
no "bastard" grain, and one-half bright sap. 

WHITE PINE. 

First Clear shall be not less than twelve inches in 
width, and no imperfections allowed unless fourteen 
inches wide or upwards; will then allow imperfec- 
tions equal to sap, one inch on one side, extending 
the whole length of the piece, on pieces fourteen inches 
wide and well manufactured, but the face side must 
be perfect; as width increases wilJ allow larger im- 
perfections in proportion to the width, but not im- 
perfections enough to decrease the value below the 
above described piece. 

Clear or "uppers" are i, i^, 1% and 2 inches 
thick. 

Second Clear shall be not less than ten inches wide, 
and perfect up to eleven inches in width ; will then 
allow imperfections equal to sap, one inch on one side 
of the whole length of the piece, if well manufac- 
tured; as width increases will allow other or larger 
imperfections in proportion to the width, but not im- 
perfections enough to decrease the value below the 
above described piece. 

Third clear shall be not less than nine inches in 
width, and perfect up to ten inches ; will then allow 
imperfections equal to sap, one inch on one side of the 



131 

whole length of the piece if well manufactured. The 
imperfections in this quality shall not exceed one hun- 
dred per cent. dVer those allowed in second clear. 

Select shall include all lumber of poorer quality than 
third clear, the imperfections of which shall not exceed 
one hundred per cent, over those allowed in third clear. 

Clear Flooring shall be one inch thick, six inches 
wide, and no imperfections. 

Second Pine Flooring shall be in thickness and 
width same as clear floorings and will allow of one 
small knot or sap three quarters (^) of an inch on one 
side, with clear face. 

Common Flooring shall be of the width and thick- 
ness of first and second clear flx)oring^ and may have 
three small sound knots, with sap one inch on one side, 
but if less than three knots then sap equal to two inches 
on one side, and shall be free from rot, splits and 
shakes. 

Four-inch flooring strips, equal in quality to first 
and second clear flooring, shall be classed as common 
six-inch flooring. 

Common Pine Lumber includes all boards, plank, 
joists, scantling, timber, fencing and four-inch strips, 
that are of a generally sound character, well manufac- 
tured, and not included in the foregoing qualities. 
Boards and planks should be square edged, full thick- 
ness, and have no large loose knots or bad shakes. 
In wide boards, twelve inches and over, will allow a 
straight split one-sixth (^) the length of the piece, 
when otherwise sound. Fencing should be of good, 
sound character — pieces that will not break easily, six 
inches wide and one inch thick. Scantling joists and 
timber should not have imperfections that would 
weaken the piece so that it cannot be used for substan- 
tial building purposes; and uniform in width and thick- 
ness. Lumber should be measured at the small end. 



132 

and, if much wane on the piece, reasonable allowance 
made for it. 

Norway pine lumber shall be classed as common 
lumber. 

Cargoes of piece stuflf or timber containing over 
twenty-five per cent. Norway shall not be considered 
standard, and all edge boards and inch lumber in cargoes 
of piece stuflf, shall be subject to special agreement. 

All badly stained white pine lumber that is other- 
wise better than common, shall be inspected into a 
lower grade than when bright and free from stain. 

All Lumber described in the foregoing Rules of Inspec- 
tion shall not be less than one inch in thickness and 
not less than twelve feet long. 

CULLS. 

Any quality that be received in t^je foregoing of 
even lengths of lo feet and upwards and so imperfect 
as to be unfit for ordinary use without waste. 

CYPRESS. 

Boards and plank should be in lengths of 12, 14 
and 16 feet; i, i^^4» i/^. 2, 2^,3, 3^ and 4 inches thick. 
Is inspected the same as poplar. 

Shakes and pecks are always a damage in cypress, 
and should be closely scrutinized. 

Strips must be 12, 14 and 16 feet long, i inch in 
thickness, and 6 inches wide, unless otherwise ordered. 
They are inspected firsts, seconds and culls. Firsts 
must be strictl}' clear. Seconds will admit of one 
small sound knot, or, in absence of knot, may be one- 
half sap on the sap side. Culls — all unsound strips 
available one-half 

Cypress is daily becoming more popular, and is used 
for a variety of purposes for both inside and outside 
work. For house gutters and conductors it is the best 
possible wood to be obtained, as water has but little 



188 

effect upon it, and it is equally as well adapted to 
general outside finish, while not a few hav^used it for 
interior molding, and also for flooring. 

SKILL VERSUS SLIPSHOD METHODS OF 

MANUFACTURE. 

Manufacturers of hardwood for shipment to any of 
the larger markets are engaged in a business which re- 
quires an especial degree of skill and care to make it 
successful. No slipshod haphazard methods will make 
them any money. If mills are allowed to run as in- 
competent or careless employees may be pleased to 
guide them, the output cannot be expected to show 
the best possible results that the quality of the raw 
material will admit of producing. Poor work in the 
mill, will, of necessity, turn out badly manufactured 
lumber, and when the inspector comes to put his rule 
upon it the effe<?t will be not at all to the shipper's liking. 
Bad sawing has been responsible for more disputes 
between sellers and buyers than has ever the natural 
defects of the timber, and three-quarters of these 
quarrels might have been avoided if the manufacturer 
had exercised reasonable care in operating his mill. 
It is proper to do all work well, simply because it is 
right ; but there is a more practical reason for sawing 
lumber just as nearly perfect as the mill can be made 
to turn it out. It pays ; and it does not pay to do it 
in any other way. It needs no argument to prove that 
well-manufactured stock sells more readily and brings 
a better price than stock that is uneven in width and 
thickness. Any one who has ever put lumber on the 
market ought to know this by experience, though the 
quantity of stock that comes forward from the mills so 
wretchedly cut as to be unfit for the uses to which it 
should be best adapted, might warrant the belief that 
mill men had no object in view save to slash up logs 
without regard to what they make. Those who cut 



134 

lumber in this fashion rarely make any money out of 
their work. They stand the losses, and their more 
careful and capable competitors reap the rewards. 
There is no part of the business that can be safely 
left to take care of itself. Even after the lumber is 
properly sawed and ready for market, the wise shipper 
will have it loaded into cars under his own eye. Ex- 
perienced dealers in hardwood say they can easily make 
one car look twenty per cent, better than another, con- 
taining precisely the same stock, and the same propor- 
tion of grades, by the manner of loading it. A good 
deal of lumber, sent into market to be sold, is bought 
merely upon such an examination as the buyer can 
make of it in the car. It is not difl&cult to so load it 
that, with a good percentage of culls, it will appear to 
be nearly all firsts and seconds, and not by any means 
a hard matter, on the other hand, to ma^ke it look like 
a cull carload all through. The larger mills have nearly 
all these things reduced to a science, and the result is 
that they usually make money. Smaller manufacturers 
would do well to imitate them in this respect; it is 
certainly more important, if anything, that they should 
save every penny there is in their product, and make 
every turn of their wheels count to its fullest extent 
in swelling their credit entries to profit and loss. 

COTTONWOOD. 

GRADES — FIRSTS, SKCONDS AND CUI.I.S. 

Firsts to be 8 inches and over in width. 
8 to 1 1 inches wide shall be clear. 
12 to 15 inches wide will admit one standard knot 

showing only on one side. 
16 to 20 inches wide will admit two standard knots 
showing only on one side. 
Live white sap allowed. 
Seconds are to be 6 inches and over in width. 



135 

6 and 7 inches wide shall be clear. 
8 to 12 inches wide will admit one standard knot. 
13 to 15 inches wide will admit two standard knots. 
16 to 20 inches wide will admit three standard knots 

Live white sap allowed. 

Culls include all lumber not equal to the grade of 
seconds y one-half of each piece being merchantable. 

Other than as above stated shall be classed as mill 
culls. 

THE CARE OF HARDWOOD LUMBER. 

Every mill-man desires to obtain the highest market 
price for the stock he manufactures, and yet lumber ar- 
rives in market daily which does not command such 
prices, not on account of its being poorly manu- 
factured, but for the simple reason of its having been 
badly piled. 

The acids of hardwoods are strong, and when two 
fresh-cut boards or planks are piled face to face, a 
souring molding, or darkening process, begins at once. 
This stain cannot be removed, and becomes intensified 
by age. 

First of all, paint the ends of logs with paint con- 
taining one pound of salt to each gallon of paint. Pile 
the lumber the same day it is sawed, placing the cross 
sticks about two feet apart, and directly over each other. 

It is the custom of many to use wide boards or 
plank for cross sticks, one at each end and one in the 
center of the pile. The result is that every board or 
plank is stained, rotten, or doty at the point of contact 
with these wide ratlines. Cross sticks should never 
be more than 2 inches wide and thoroughly dry. 

Another reason for the concessions in price is often 
made on hardwoods when it reaches the market is 
that in cross sticking lumber with wide long stock, 
the same as that in the pile, it necessitates a pile to be 
12, 14 or 16 feet wide. Such a pile cannot be well 



136 

ventilated ; as a consequence, much of the lumber in 
the center becomes streaked and browned in the hot 
months by the gaseous vapors which have evaporated 
from the lumber during the day, and settled back upon 
it during the night. 

BLACK WALNUT. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be six inches wide and 
over. At 8 inches one inch of sap or one standard 
knot, and at lo inches two inches of sap or two 
standard knots may be allowed. An allowance for 
more defects of this character may be made in pro- 
portion to increased width. 

Common shall be 5 inches and over wide and shall 
include all lumber not up to the grade of firsts and 
seconds, but available full three-fourths of its size 
without waste, free from hearts and unsound lumber. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

CHERRY. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and 
over. At 8 inches may have one inch of sap or one 
standard knot, and at 10 inches two inches of sap or 
two standard knots. An allowance for more defects 
of this character may be made in proportion to in- 
creased width. 

Common shall be 5 inches and over wide and shall 
include all lumber not up to the grade of firsts and 
seconds, but available full three-fourths of its size for 
use without waste, free from hearts and unsound 
lumber. 



/ ■ 



187 

Cull shall comprise all widths aud sizes below the 

description of common. 

NoTB — Gum spots are considered a serious defect aud 
when their damage exceeds one-sixth of the size of the piece 
shall reduce it to the grade of common. When their damage 
exceeds one-third of the size of the piece, it shall be reduced 
to cull. 

BUTTERNUT AND CHESTNUT. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts an4 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and over, 
At 8 inches may have one inch of sap or one standar4 
knot, and at lo inches two inches of sap or two 
standard knots. An allowance for more defects of 
this character may be made in proportion to increased 
width. 

Common shall be 5 inches and over wide. At 6 
inches one inch of sap or one standard knot, and at 8 
inches two inches of sap or two standard knots may 
be allowed. An allowance for more defects of this 
character may be made in proportion to increased width. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

GUM. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and over. 
At 8 inches one standard knot, and at 10 inches two 
standard knots or one inch of bright sap may be 
allowed. An allowance for more defects of this 
character maybe made in proportion to increased width. 

Common shall include all lumber available for use 
full three-fourths of its size without waste, free from 
hearts and unsound lumber. Clear sap may be in- 
cluded in this grade. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 



138 
HARD AND SOFT MAPLE. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, cottimon, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 5 inches wide and over 
(except flooring). At 8 inches one, and at 10 inches 
two standard knots may be allowed. An allowance 
for more defects of this character may be made in 
proportion to increased width. 

Common shall be sound, 5 inches and over in 
width, and may have defects not injuring it for ordi- 
nary use without waste. At 6 inches one and at 8 
inches two standard knots may be allowed. An al- 
lowance for more defects of this character may be 
made in proportion to increased width. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

BA88WOOD. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6^ inches wide and 
over. At 8 inches one and at 10 inches two standard 
knots may be allowed. An allowance for more de- 
fects of this character may be made in proportion to 
increased width. Bright sap is no defect. 

Common shall include 5 inches and over wide. 
At 6 inches one, and at 8 inches two standard knots 
may be allowed. An allowance for more defects of 
this character may be made in proportion to increased 
width. Slightly discolored sap is allowed. 

Cull shall\:omprise all widths and sizes below the 
description or common. 

BIRCH. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull; ~ 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and over. 



]8d 

At 8 inches one and at lo inches two standard knots 
may be allowed. An allowance for more defects of 
this character may be made in proportion to increased 
width. Bright sap is no defect. 

Common shall be sound, 5 inches and over in 
width, and may have defects not injuring it for 
ordinary use without waste. At six inches one and 
at 8 inches two standard knots may be allowed. An 
allowance for more defects of this character may be 
made in proportion to increased width. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

BEECH AND SYCAMORE. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and over. 
At 8 inches one and at 10 inches two standard knots 
may be allowed. An allowance for more defects of 
this character may be made in proportion to increased 
width. 

Common shall be sound, 5 inches and over wide, 
and may have defects not injuring it for ordinary use 
without waste. At 6 inches one and at 8 inches two 
standard knots may be allowed. An allowance for 
more defects of this character may be made in propor- 
tion to increased width. 

Cull shall comprise all widths and sizes below the 
description of common. 

ELM. 

The inspection grades shall consist of firsts and 
seconds, common, and cull. 

Firsts and seconds must be 6 inches wide and over. 
At 8 inches one and at 10 inches two standard knots 
may be allowed. An allowance for more defects of 
this character may be made in proportion to increased 
width. Bright sap is no defect. 



140 

Commou shall include 5 inches and over wide. At 
6 inches one and at 8 inches two standard knots may 
be allowed. An allowance for more defects of this 
character may be made in proportion to increased width. 

ASH. 

GRADES. — FIRSTS, SECONDS AND CULLS. 

Firsts are to be 8 inches and over in width. 
8 to 1 2 inches wide shall be clear. 
13 to 15 inches wide will admit one standard knot, 

showing only on one side. 
16 to 20 inches wide will admit two standard knots, 
showing only on one side. 

Live white sap allowed. 

Seconds are to be 6 inches and over in width. 
6 and 7 inches wide shall be clear. 
8 to 12 inches wide will admit one standard knot. 

13 to 15 inches wide will admit two standard knots. 
16 to 20 inches wide will admit three standard knots. 

STRIPS. 

4 to 5 inches wide shall be clear, or clear one side. 

Heart, or doted, boards and plank will not be ad- 
mitted in firsts and seconds. 

Culls include all lumber not equal to the grade of 
Seconds, one-half of each piece being merchantable. 
Other than as above stated shall be classed as mill ctills. 

ASH JOISTS. 

4 in. X 4 in. to 10 in. x 10 in. square. 

Firsts are to be 10 feet and upward in length, clear, 
sound and free from all defects, and of full size when 
seasoned. 

Seconds are to be sound and free from hearts, 
shakes, and checks. 
10 and 12 feet lengths admit two standard knots. 

14 and 16 feet lengths admit three standard knots. 
Bright sap admitted. These defects are based on 



141 

6 in. X 6 in. joists, and are to bear the same ratio in 
other sizes. 

Culls include all joists not equal to the grade of 
seconds, one-half of each piece being merchantable. 

Other than above stated shall be classed as mill culls. 

Note. — Ash flooring should be 3, 4, 5, and 6 inches wide, 
with one face and two edges clear, i and \% inches thick, 12, 
14 and 16 feet long. Common and cull strips have no value 
in market. 

Ash newe Is and balusters same as black walnut. 

Like all hardwoods, ash must be well manufactured to 
meet \anth ready sale at highest market prices. Wane and 
taper are serious defects. 

SECOND GROWTH ASH. 

Sawed through and through, and rough edged, 

shall be measured inside the wane, and in the center 

of the piece. 

OAK.-(Plain.] 

GRADES. — FIRSTS, SECONDS AND CUI.LS. 

Firsts are to be 8 inches and over in width. 
8 to 1 2 inches wide shall be clear. 
13 to 15 inches wide will admit one standard knot, 

showing only on one side. 
16 to 20 inches wide will admit two standard knots, 
showing only on one side. 

Live sap admitted on one side, not to exceed one- 
tenth of the surface if without other defects. Worm 
holes not admitted. 

Seconds are to be 8 inches and over in width. 
8 to 1 2 inches wide will admit one standard knot. 
13 to 15 inches wide will admit two standard knots. 
1 6 to 20 inches wide will admit three standard knots. 

Live sap admitted on one side, not to exceed one- 
fifth of the surface, if without other defects. Worm 
holes are serious defects, and should cull any piece, 
where enough appear to equal one or more standard 
knots, according to the width of the piece. 



142 

Culls include all lumber not equal to the grade of 
seconds, one half of each piece being merchantable. 
Other than as above stated shall be classed as mill culls. 

Oak sawed through and through, not edged, shall 
be measured inside the wane, and tapering pieces are 
to be measured in the center. 

It is the nature of oak to crack in drying, not only 
in the ends but on the face, and it should be the study 
of the sharp-sighted mill-man to reduce that feature 
to a minimum. First of all paint the ends of the logs, 
put into every gallon of paint one-half pint of salt, 
and when the lumber is sawed and ready to pile place 
the sticks close together and directly over each other, 
and, above all things, thoroughly protect the lumber 
from the sun and rain. Heavy dews and occasional 
rain-falls, followed by the rays of a burning sun, will 
spoil the best of oak in a very short time; it^ therefore 
pays to put a substantial covering over each pile. 

Shippers should bear in mind that common or cull 
oak is particularly unsaleable in any market. Only 
good, sound stock is wanted. 

EXPORT OAK. 

Oak for export should be i inch, ij4, 2, 2%, 3, 4, 
5 and 6 inches thick, 10 inches and over wide, 12, 14, 
and 16 feet long. The more 14 and 16 feet the better, 
but never less than one-third of each length. It must 
be square edged and butted, parallel widths, plump 
and even thickness and well manufactured, fre^ from 
heart, checks, splits, large or loose knots, or worm 
holes. This inspection is very comprehensive, and 
will admit of no deviation. For instance, it says 10 
inches and over wide — ^% inches will not do. It says 
free from heart. Don't think because the plank is 6 
inches thick, and the heart comes right in the center, 
and won't show on either side that it will go, for it 



143 

won't. Follow strictly the rule, and you can find a 
good market for all the export oak you want to cut. 

QUARTERED OAK. 

GRADES. — FIRSTS AND SECONDS. 

Firsts are to be 6 inches and over in width. 
6 to 9 inches wide shall be clear. 
ID inches and over in width will admit one standard 

knot, showing only on one side, or equal defect. 
ID inches and over in width will admit two standard 

knots, or equal defects. 

STRIPS. 

4 to 5 inches wide shall be clear, or clear one side. 

Worm holes, in excess of the defects allowed for 
knots, and stained or discolored wood, not admitted. 



WARPAGn AND SHRINKAGE OF 

I^UMBBR. 



What causes lumber to warp in the many various 
ways, yet remains to be solved. All kinds of lumber 
in small dimensions will warp in seasoning if not 
placed directly on sticks. This is the remedy, in short. 
The unequal shrinkage of the grain has much to do 
with crooked lumber. Lumber from crooked or lean- 
ing trees will warp badly. Second growth timber is 
very bad about warpage in seasoning. If one side of 
a board is dried faster than the other, it will contract, 
thus cupping or concaving that side. Lumber freshly 
sawed will warp always from the heart. There seems 
to be an unequal strain on the grain before it is cut. 
Often a straight tree will turn out badly sprung tim- 
ber. This can be noticed when the grain shows 
irregularities, which show unequal istress. This is not 
shown so plainly when first sawed, but if remaining 



144 

exposed for but a short while will warp and spring 
badly. Natural' air drying is the best for oak, es- 
pecially for a while, until partly seasoned. Oak and 
other valuable timber should not be stacked up in 
open air without a shed over it, which should be 
elevated aiid protect the ends of lumber from damp- 
ness. Narrow and open piles are what is wanted for 
a free circulation of air. The hot rays of the sun bring 
about an action that terminates in checked ends. 
Artificial drying of oak by the many kiln processes is 
not successful. Where the heat is normal and of a 
low temperature, narrow stock may be successfully 
dried from checking. The ends of such lumber should 
,be painted with a thick coating of waterproof white or 
fedlead paint. Broad boards should be cleated on 
ends. Sticks should be not over three feet apart, with 
weights on top course. Great care should be taken 
not to have pile too wide and with one inch space 
between boards. 

WHEN TO CUT VALUABLE TIMBER. WHAT CAUSES 
OAK AND OTHER WOODS TO BE BRASHY. 

Porous timber, such as oak, ash and hickory, should 
not be cut in the spring when the sap is up. The 
pores of the wood are then open , the wood being in a 
growing state, and when dr>^ remain so, which makes 
it more brittle and less durable. 

This is accounted for by the abstraction of all the 
unctuous matter, which accounts for worms and other 
insects. During the fall and winter months the grain 
can be noticed as being less porous and containing 
more of the vegetable oil essential to its toughness and 
durability. This timber will dry much sooner when 
cut in the winter months. 

DRY ROT IN TIMBER. 

Prof. Bidlake, of Rhode Island, makes the following 
report on dr}^ rot : 



140 

No wood which is liable to damp, or has at any 
time absorbed moisture and is in contact with stag- 
nant air, so that the moisture cannot evaporate, can 
be considered safe from the attacks of dry rot. 

Any impervious substance applied to wood which 
is not thoroughly dry tends to engender decay ; floor 
covered with kamptuKcon and laid over brick arching 
before the latter was dry ; cement dado to wood parti- 
tion, the water expelled from dado in setting and 
absorbed by the wood had no means of evaporation. 

Wood work coated with a paint or tar before 
thoroughly dry and well seasoned is liable to decay, 
as the moisture is imprisoned. 

Skirtings and wall paneling very subject to dry 
rot, and especially window backs, for the space between 
the woodwork and the wall is occupied by stagnant 
air; the former absorbs moisture from the wall (es- 
pecially if it has been fixed before the wall was dry 
after building), and the paint or varnish prevents the 
moisture from evaporating into the room. Skirting, 
etc., thus form excellent channels for the spread of 
the fungus. Plaster seems to be sufiiciently porous to 
allow the evaporation of water through it ; hence, 
probably the space between ceiling and floor is not so 
frequently attacked, if also the floor boards do not fit 
very accurately and no oil cloth covers the floor. 

Plowed and tongued floors -are disadvantageous in 
certain circumstances, as when placed over a space 
occupied by damp air, as they allow no air to pass 
between the boards and so dry them. Beams may 
appear sound externally and be rotten within, for the 
outside being in contact with the air, becomes drier 
than the interior. It is well, therefore, to saw and 
reverse all large scantling. The ends of all timber, 
and especially of large beams, should be free, (for it is 
through the ends that moisture chiefly evaporates). 
They should on no account be imbedded in niortat. 



146 

' r 

Inferior and ill-seasoned timber is evidentl}^ to be 
avoided. Whatever insures dampness and lack of 
evaporation is conducive to dry rot, that is to say,- 
dampness arising from the soil; dampness arising 
from walls, especially if the damp proof course has 
been omitted ; dampness arising from the use of salt 
sand; dampness arising from drying of mortar and 
cement. Stagnation of air resulting from air grids 
getting blocked with dirt or being purposely blocked 
through ignorance. Stagnation may exist under a 
floor, although there are grids in the opposite walls, 
for it is diflGlcult to induce the air to move in a hori- 
zontjal direction without some special means of suction. 
Corners of stagnant air are to be guarded against. 

Darkness assists the development of fungus ; what- 
ever increases the temperature of the wood and stag- 
nant air (within limit) also assists. 

SEASONING. 

After careful experiments made on behalf of the 
Chicago, Burlington & Quincy Railroad, at Aurora, 
111., regarding the natural seasoning of various woods, 
it was concluded that oak began to season naturally 
in March or April; that pine lost moisture within a 
fortnight after its first exposure ; that ash and poplar 
began the loss in April, and elm immediately on being 
exposed in January. With the exception of elm the 
seasoning of most woods ends with the summer 
months. All woods take up slight moisture during 
wet weather in fall and winter ; pine of small dimen- 
sion, like inch flooring, will absorb moisture during 
the wet months ; one season of average weather is 
generally sufficient to season wood for purposes of 

construction. 

WEIGHT OF WOODS. 

The following list, giving the weight of hardwood 
per foot, board measure, has been prepared with great 



147 



* 



care, and in the main is correct. Some allowance 
must be made in the weight of fresh cut, as the same 
wood differs some in weight when green, in different 
localities : 

Name of Wood. Green lbs. to i ft. Dry lbs. to i ft. 

Ash 4>^ y/2 

Apple 5 4 

Beech 5 4^ 

Birch 4X 3>4 

Basswood 3>^ 2X 

Chestnut 3^ 3 

Cherry 4 3X 

Cottonwood 7)4 3 

Cypress ^ 4 2}4 

Cedar 4 3 

Elm 4 3 

Hickory 5 4)4 

Holly 5'A 4>^2 

Lignum Vitae 9 S^ 

Maple 5 4>^ 

Mahogany 5X • 4K 

• Oak . . - 5>^ 4>4 

Poplar 3X 2^ 

Rosewood 8 6^ 

Sycamore 5 4 

Sweet Gum 3^ 2K 

Walnut 4}4 3)4 

White Pine 4 2% 

Yellow Pine 4)4 3)i 

HOW TO BE A SUCCESSFUL SAWYER. 

It is not necessary for a sawyer to be a thorough 
machinist or millwright, but must acquire sufficient 
knowledge of machinery to keep a mill in good repair. 
It is necessary to watch the vital parts that affect the 
saw, engine and machinery, watching closely the small 
details which avert accidents. .Saw and carriage, as 
well as the mandrel, must be kept in line. Keep saw 
round by jointing the teeth with a piece of grindstone, 
fire-brick or broken emery-wheel. Do not saw in a 
notch, but move sideways gently, or the corners will 
be ground off too much. Do not joint a saw with a 



bar of iron or file. The latter may be used if saw re- 
volves very slowly. Keep the teeth of uniform length 
and pitch, so that all will cut and saw remain in bal- 
ance. No two mills will run alike, neither will two 
new saws run alike on same mandrel. Then it is es- 
pecially necessary to learn the so-called peculiarities 
of a saw. 

First, put the saw in good order by filing as directed 
in this book. If saw does not screw up flat on log 
side, either paper or hammer it ; when straight, line it 
with the carriage and level the saw mandrel. Take 
out all end play, and see that bearii|gs are a neat fit. 
If saw crowds from the log, give it a little more lead. 
If it heats in center it is because saw is too open for 
speed, or is not properly lined. If it heats on the rim 
the saw requires more tension. If it runs into the log 
it will then heat because of too much lead, either in 
saw, mandrel or filing. The lead in mandrel can be 
changed but little ; neither can a saw be run with too 
much pressure on guides. The filing may be changed 
to lead the saw, the saw inclining always to the longest 
side of the tooth. If saw heats on rim without run- 
ning into the log, the bearing next to saw should be 
tightened suflSciently to heat a little. Such a saw 
needs tensioning as treated in hammering, it being too 
stifi*. Care should be taken not to feed too fast 
on the first side of a log, and not to take too heavy a 
slab when log is squared up. A saw may run in too 
much, especially after passing the heart. If engine 
has ample power and will hold up, saw will do better 
by giving it more feed. Invariably this will work. 
Knotty, tough logs skould be sawed from the butt 
end; otherwise the log will pinch the saw badly. 
When a saw begins to heat in center it will lay over 
and assume a deadening, rumbling noise against the 
guide pins. In such cases do not crowd saw, or it will 



]49 

burn in blue spots ; better move the guide a littler 

No saw should be run too long without filing. 
The best saw in the world can soon be ruined by 
running too long before filing. In filing from one 
side of saw, be sure that teeth are square in front. 
This is determined by a slight "queaking" noise to 
file ; not a " chatter" by any means, neither a free cut. 
If spring set is used, a little swaging must be done to 
keep the extreme point the widest with a sharp cor- 
ner to tooth. Double spread teeth should not have 
needle or brier corners, neither a round, dull corner. 
A sharp saw should not be crowded for the first few 
lines, as its keen edge will be affected and crumble in 
a hard or knotty log. If saw is not true, do not try 
to close guides too much ; better let saw run free than 
to have it whipping in the guides and heating. Use 
plenty of set, which must be uniform. If saw is true, 
runs true and has no lumps in it, a much less set 
may be used. When a saw heats all over it is because 
saw is dull or has not set enough. Because an 8" 
gauge saw has one-quarter inch full set does not sa}^ 
that it will clear a full place in saw which heats and 
gives trouble. Too much set will not do, especially 
with too many teeth ; the dust being cut fine, throats 
of teeth will not chamber it, thus heating the rim. A 
saw that heats at rim and center has no lead in man- 
drel and is held up too much with guide. Such a saw 
will run in considerably at top of cut, yet heating in 
center. This must be observed closely. Many men 
do not take the time to even think what is the matter 
with a saw, but keep moving guides, which only 
changes saw to no better running. 

Keep the following in view for attaining success : 
First. — See that saw is all right and hangs right on 
collar ; if not, make it as near so as possible. 

Second. — File the saw in accordance with the way 



150 

it hangs on mandrel. No two saws screw up alike on 
mandrel, and should they apparently do so, will not 
run precisely alike. If saw leans a trifle from the log, 
and time and circumstances will not admit truing it, 
file it to lead a little into the log ; if saw leans or 
dishes to the log, then move mandrel until saw will 
run right ; but not too much, or center will heat. 

Third. — In starting up a mill you are not familiar 
with, do not rush on the start. Feed saw gently and 
find its inclination, noting about the condition of its 
tension, and if wavy on rim, that is, snakes, move saw 
out a little with guides. If it leans too much from 
log, the mandrel must be moved (if right) out a little 
and saw filed a trifle into the log. . If possible, make 
bearing next to saw run warm. 

Fourth. — Notice carefully if saw inclines out of 
log and whether it is heating at center or not, which 
it will do if saw does not snake. A saw inclining out 
of log will run out more as feed is increased and less 
as decreased, but will not run out for a few feet and 
then turn in again. In such cases saw is loose on rim 
and not too open. All saws too open for speed will 
heat in center, first being certain that mandrel is in 
line. 

Fifth. — See that carriage track is straight and prac- 
tically level, both rails must exactly correspond, 
otherwise it will run in a wind, which gives much 
trouble in deep cuts by influencing saws. Carriage 
must also have but little end play to bearings. This 
allows a springy cant to heat saw in center by pulling 
carriage closer to saw. See that driving belt runs 
smooth. A thumping joint will affect a saw by im- 
parting a vibration to mandrel, especially if too light 
and springy. 

Sixth. — Any saw will run better if a light spray of 
water can be applied on the log side by a small jet 



161 

under control of sawyer. It acts as a lubricant, which, 
as oil in a bearing, keeps it cool. The saw certainly 
is exposed to considerable unavoidable friction. It is 
not best to have a sluice of water applied to wet mill 
and dampen dust so as to clog conveyor, but a gentle 
spray that cannot be noticed will add a twenty per 
cent, better running saw in hard or dry logs. 

THM SAWYMRS' RULH. 



HOW TO MAKE QUICK, ACCURATE CALCULATIONS 
FOR WHAT 18 WANTED FROM THE LOC. 

There are many sawyers, setters that are not quick 
in their calculations, losing time and spoiling lumber. 
No man can be quick calculating one piece at a time. 
He must have it instantly in his head, that no time be 
lost. 

CALCULATING ON INCH STUFF. 

Every five inches makes four boards on a saw cutting 
one-quarter inch. Now, if one inch is to be left on 
blocks, five, ten, fifteen and twenty inches, and so on, 
will come out right. If cant is between these numbers, 
say about eighteen inches, set at eighteen and three- 
fourths, and so on. Now, if one or more two- 
inch pieces are wanted, leave off one-fourth inch 
for every two-inch piece wanted. If four two-inch 
pieces are wanted, nineteen inches will come out right, 
being one inch less than twenty inches. If two inches 
is Jeft on headblocks calculate one-fourth less than a 
multiple of five inches, in this way twelve inches, 
eighteen and one-fourth and twenty-four and one-half 
will come out right. 

SAWING TWO-INCH STUFF. 

For as many pieces as are wanted add one-fourth of 
an inch for saw kerf as follows : If eight pieces are 



152 

wanted it makes sixteen inches, add seven-quarters, 
makes seventeen and three-fourths inches. Correct. 
Always calculate one-fourth of an inch less, as the 
last line of the saw makes two pieces; If one or more 
inch boards are wanted, add one-fourth of an inch to 
calculation already made. 

SAWING FIVE-EIGHTHS LUMBER. 

Every three and one-half inches makes four five- 
eighths boards. For seven, ten and one-half, fourteen, 
seventeen and one-half, and so on, add two inches for last 
piece on carriage. Three-quarter inch stuff sets at even 
inches. Inch and a quarter lumber sets at one and 
one-half, three inches making two boards. 

FOR THIN SAWS. 

Many mills use a ten gauge saw,cutting three-six- 
teenths saw kerf. In such cases inch stuff may be set 
at one and one-eighth, making inch stuff seven-eighths 
inch full. If blocks set to sixteenths of inch, one- 
sixteenth can be saved, which is one board gained in 
sixteen cuts. Setting one-eighth inch less for inch 
boards the calculation is the same as for two-inch stuff 
as stated. 

BAND SAW KERF. 

One-eighth is allowed for saw kerf. Inch boards cal- 
culate as follows : If cant is about eighteen inches 
(no well-up sawyer can take time to be measuring with 
his rule), twice eight being sixteen inches, now we 
have seven-quarters to add, being seventeen and three- 
fourths or add one board, making eighteen and seven- 
eighths. It is necessary to first find out how many 
boards make an even number, or as near that as pos- 
sible : then double, or multiply this number according 
to size of log. 



158 
SHORT METHOD OF CALCULATING LUMBER. 

The rule for calculating lumber is to multiply the 
thickness by the width in inches, then by the length 
in feet, and divide by twelve. This is the only rule ; 
but it can be greatly modified as follows : loo pieces 
I X ID X 12 feet. Now we multiply lOO x lo, which 
without figuring is i,ooo. Now to multiply by 12 
makes 12,000. This divided by 12 makes even 1,000 
feet. 

The short method leaves the 12 out and says 10 
times 100 is 1,000 feet of lumber — no figuring at all. 
Any part of or factor of 1 2 may be left out and divided 
by the remaining factors, as follows : 876 pieces 3x4 
X 20 feet. Leave the figures 3 and 4 out, and twenty 
times 876 is 17,520. Again: 56 pieces 4 x 8 x 18 
feet. We leave the 4 out, then say 3 into 18 goes 6 
times, 3 being the other factor of 12, as 3 and 4. Now 
you have only 56, 8 and 3 to be multiplied together, 
which makes the correct answer. If the whole were 
to be multiplied together, then divided by 12, it would 
take considerable time, which is more likely to result 
in errors. 

Where it is possible, leave out the following figures : 
2, 3, 4, 6 and 12, but not any more than will make 12 
when multiplied together, as 2 x 6 is 12, or, 3 x 4 is 
12. If desired, any one of the above factors may be 
left out separately, as follows : 125 pieces 6 x 16 x 22. 
Leave out the 6 and divide the remainder by 2, the 
other factor. This not only saves the time of 
multiplying the 6 together but saves the division of 12. 

LUMBER MEASURED BY CANCELLATION.-A 
LIGHTNING METHOD. 

Anyone that will familiarize himself with calculating 
lumber by cancellation after my method has no use 
for the many page calculators figured out in books. 
Fractions are as readily calculated as whole numbers ; 



154 

and examples that would require one thousand figures 
or more to work can be almost instantly cancelled, 
with all fractional parts included, making the correct 
answer. Not one man in one hundred can work the 
following example correctly, which I show readily 
cancels out. First some explanation of this is neces- 
sary. Multiply the whole numbers by the fraction 
below the line (the denominator), and add the fraction 
above the line (the numerator) to the result, as in the 
example below : 8^ multiplied together is V* , 7 times 
8 being 56, adding the 2, making 58. Fractions in 
the calculation of the size and number of feet have 
their denominator placed on the left side of a ver- 
tical line. This example is of a most difficult 
type, and is beyond the range in lumber cal- 
culations ; but it expresses the simpleness of the 
method. What will y} pieces of 8f x 8f x 2 1^ feet long 
cost at 1 2^ dollars per i ,000 feet ? 

The sizes, number of pieces and lengths of the 
lumber have their denominators placed on the left, as 
stated. The price at which it is sold being placed on 
the right, add 12, or the factors of 12, on the left side. 
Answer, $11.60. By leaving the price of the lumber 
out (/f) , we have 908 feet of lumber. 

Explanation: 12 crosses 36 3 times ; 3 checks 3 
on the left ; 5 checks 35 by 7 times ; 7 cancels 7 on 
left ; 64 checks 64 on the left. We have only 4 
on the left hand and 58 and 5 on right; 5 times 
58 is 290, and 4 times 290 is $11.60. In the case 
of the calculation of feet, only what figures 
remain on the left hand side after cancellation are 
divided into the numbers that remain on the right 
after they are all multiplied together. How many feet 
in 14 pieces 5^ x 8^ x 16 feet long? Answer, 833 feet. 

In this example we use 3 and 4 as factors of 12. 
In cancellation all numbers that will divide from both 



165 

sides without a fraction can be cancelled. The 
ordinary method of calculating lumber is to multiply 
the width and thickness together, then the length by 
the number of pieces and divide this by 12, the 
number of square inches in a foot of lumber. 
The last example given is a fair specimen. Tapered 
lumber has the two ends added together and 
divided by two, then proceed. Anyone that once 
adopts this mode of calculating lumber will never drop 
it. Being simple, it insures correctness. Where the 
piece is to be multiplied, put the denominator on right 
and the whole number on left, and multiply it by the 
result. Dressed lumber is calculated as rough, that 
is, the size it was before being dressed. 

HOW TO SUCCESSFULLY RUN A PLANER. 

• 

To manage such machinery and get out first-class 
work requires great care and close judgment. A 
planer should be set on a solid foundation with all fast 
moving parts well balanced. In new machines, such 
are well balanced. The cylinder and cutter-heads 
being the most sensitive, they must run a neat fit in 
bearings, with suflScient lining, so that caps will remain 
firm and not jar or work loose. Every machine should 
have a pair of proportionate balance scales for balanc- 
ing knives. If these cannot be had, an ordinary pair 
of balances will answer, care being taken to keep 
knives of same width at each end ;• otherwise the 
knives might weigh just the same amount and each 
alternate end of two knives throw the cylinder out of 
balance. The fraction of an ounce will greatly affect 
a high-speeded machine. The bolts should all be the 
same size. Often a miscellaneous lot of studs can be 
found on a cylinder, which would throw machine out. 
An unbalanced cylinder has many peculiarities about 
it that affect the whole machine. Hot bearing and 
rough lumber are the results. By placing cylinder on 



156 

two level straightedges it can be readily detected 
whether in balance or not, the heavy side finding the 
center of gravity very quickly. This should be done 
with knives off. By grinding the bolts on heavy side, 
a perfect balance can be had, always screwing it down 
to where it is to run ; if not, it will deceive. Knives 
out of balance wear the heavy side of journal flat, or 
slightly so. In such cases it is very difficult to get 
good work out of machine. I will add that before 
placing cylinder on straightedges, bearing should be 
calipered so the truest part will rest directly on 
straightedge. Clean cylinder and pullies well of dust 
and gum before testing. 

Belts should be neatly spliced. A bulky fastening 
makes waves at regular intervals, to say nothing of 
such fastenings continually pulling loose and heating 
bearings. The chip-breaker, pressure-bars and rollers 
are vital parts. They must be set just right or the 
end of board will be nicked. The pressure-bars just 
behind the knives should be set as closely as possible, 
or lumber will be wavy. Modern six and eight-roll 
machines have very powerful feed and will feed under 
heavy pressure ; but the lighter four-roll machines re- 
quire continual attention in surfacing. 

Dry and green lumber cannot be dressed well 
together. The green stuff not being as firm, requires 
more pressure and less pressure from pressure-bar. 
The bar " shoe," or roller, in front of cylinder must be 
set very closely so as to hold work down firm on bed 
plate for smooth lumber. The pivoted bar is best, as 
it readily accommodates itself to irregular thicknesses. 
The pressure-bars fore and aft the cylinder must be 
kept closely but so as to not interfere with feed. The 
rollers and bed plate are ver}' essential parts. The 
latter should be nearly on line with top of bottom 
roller or a trifle lower. For g^een lumber, bottQm 



157 

rollers must be a little higher, otherwise work will not 
feed. The boards should go end ta end through 
machine. 

^ The fence, or gauge, is another important feature, 
and unless right, bad results will follow in matching. 
It is best to have just as little lead as possible and use 
a pressure- lever to hold crooked stuff up. The result 
of too much lead is that the end of board jumps, or 
rather, inclines, toward groove side as the end of 
gauge is passed. This makes bad work. The cause 
of this is that the stock is going through at a slight 
angle and not square with rolls. The chip-breaker 
should not be too tight. All this is governed by the 
amount of pressure from pressure-bar and power of 
feed rolls. Chip-breaker should be as close as possible 
to cutter-head, that it may not " eat," or tear, the 
work. Knives set too far out on cylinder will eat when 
across the grain. 

For fine, nice work one-eighth should be the pro- 
jection from lip of head; three-sixteenths is about 
right for ordinary work. Knives must be ground 
true and not beveled off with a file. The proper angle 
cannot be given, owing to class of work ; but would say 
fifteen degrees is about right. A good knife will stand 
more than this and do nice work ; but the majority 
have hard and soft places, which, if too much angle, 
will crumble or turn the edge. A slim bevel must be 
set close to the lip (or chip-breaker, as termed) of the 
cylinder, or it will eat in crossgrain work, as in curly 
stock. 

Side cutters often give much trouble, principall}^ 
from bits being out of balance or spindle not a neat 
fit to head, throwing it out of balance. A journal 
that heats and wears very fast under precaution is in- 
variably because the head is out of balance and should 
be taken out and balanced. No perceptible (or but 



168 

little) end play should be given. If too close, the 
least heat will make spindles longer by expansion and 
will heat much worse. 

The question often arises, What causes a wave or 
niche in the front end of board? There are several 
direct causes. First, rollers and bed-plate are not in 
line ; front pressure-bar not close enough ; bed-plate 
too low or too high and not level; that is, parallel 
with roller ; too low, so that stock will not rest on it 
without pressure from pressure-bar. The result often 
(with bar as tight as possible) is a niche in end of work. 
This is caused by work not fitting firmly to bed-plate, 
which causes lumber to give down when the second 
pressure-bar takes it. This defect ranges from two to 
four inches from end of board. This being remedied, 
the rear end of board may nick. This is caused by 
bed-plate not being high enough on front side, and 
when pressure-roller leaves board, causes it to raise 
slightly, thus making a bad end. As stated, the lower 
rollers must be level and in line parallel to each other, 
with bed-plate a trifle lower than rollers. If the board 
is nicked at each or one end when pressure-bars were 
down it is because it is not quite high enough. If 
too high, the same result is had. 

On lower cylinders, the rear bed-plate should be 
one sixty-fourth inch lower, or in proportion to what 
cut is taken. In setting the gauge (fence or lead), a 
line is drawn clear through machine square with 
rollers. Then set gauge so that front end will be one- 
half inch farther from line than end near cylinder. 
Rollers must be kept square and of same height. 
An uneven pressure will tend work to run crooked. 
Rollers must be kept free from gum. Gearing should 
be well cared for, and where exposed should be oiled 
on the teeth, and where fended may be oiled. The 
mpdern machine with exhaust fan keeps shavings 



159 

out, and generally gearing is open. I^oose motion 
should be avoided, and rollers kept clear. Cut gearing 
is much better and runs more steady. No rough gear 
can be perfect which causes unsteady feed with a jerk- 
ing motion. This causes rough work. Only a close 
application of thought and time will develop fine 
results. The aim must be toward the sensitive parts, 
and because a board will go through a machine do 
not be content that it is in good order. Few men 
have mastered the planer. 

SPEED AND FEED OF PLANERS. 

This is conditional. A true journal, well-balanced 
cylinder, and heavy, well-set machine will do good 
work at a speed of four thousand five hundred revo- 
lutions, feeding seventy-five feet per minute. There 
are many machines that feed one hundred feet and 
do good work. On the other hand, a light machine 
with unbalanced knives will not stand over two thou- 
sand five hundred revolutions and a feed of thirty to 
forty feet per minute. The limit may be said to be 
left with the skill of operator, taking into considera- 
tion the wear and condition of machine. All ma- 
chines should be watched. Loose-threaded bolts 
subjected to much jar or strain are liable to work 
loose. 

ON MATCHING. 

A planer may surface well and do good work un- 
til it comes to the matching of flooring and ceiling. 
Side cutters must have but visible end motion ; other- 
wise the irregularity of the grain will take up the 
loose motion, making stuff that will not match in 
places. I have seen two boards come out of a machine 
perfect, and in less time than it takes to tell it two 
more were tried that did not match. The pressure- 
bars should press equally on the board, and not too 



100 

heavy next to the gauge, as it will climb off. Too 
much lead, as stated, will cause trouble. The rear 
guides have but little to do more than guide the 
work. A well-lined, level machine does not depend 
on the aft guides for good work. Feed rollers must 
not be too tight on work. Dull and badly fitted 
knives give much trouble, in that soft boards are cut 
thinner than harder ones. Dull knives do not cut, but 
knock it off. Dull knives often heat bearings. 

SETTING KNIVES. 

Put a couple strips on bed-plate lower cylinder 
until they are firm ; turn cylinder until 
knife will rest on strips, being certain that both 
ends are down. Then tighten this knife cautiously. 
Then with a pointer set to just touch this knife, and 
all the remainder set to just the same feeling or hear- 
ing. Some use a gauge set from the lip of cylinder, 
which is not always perfect. 

BABBITTING CYLINDER BEARINGS. 

Many experts recommend a form or separate man- 
drel to babbitt with. This is not necessary and is 
not attended with good results, as it does not conform 
to the wear of journals. 

The theory is that heat from the metal elongates 
that side and is liable to spring journals. This might 
be adhered to if no precaution is taken, but a little 
precaution overcomes this. By heating the cap of 
box to nearly a red heat, laying it in place with man- 
drel in position for babbitting; by moving it frequently, 
the journal will be heated and allays all danger of 
springing. This must be adhered to or there is lia- 
bility of springing journal permanently. After metal 
has cooled sufficiently, remove cylinder and scrape 
boxes out, scraping the ** lip," and not the crown. By 
screwing caps down to place, a pair of calipers will 



Voui 



161 

sbow that from crown to crown is more than directly 
where cap and box come together, which shows the 
contraction of metal. About one-third of the bearing 
should be nicely scraped, then place journal iu bearings 
having a thin coat of redkad appUed. Now turn cyhn- 
derafew times and carefully remove it. Thus the 
high spot will plainly show and must be scraped 
down. Alt this is necessary for good work and cool 
journals from high-speeded machines. The same ap- 
plies to the cutter-heads. If journals heat use plum- 
bago, tallow and sulphur. Soda is good. All must 
be prepared in good lubricating oil. Never use black 
lil on a planer. Use lard or some other good thin 
The gearing and feedworks are generally worn 
t before the machine is for the want of proper oil- 
ing. 

BUILDING PLANING MILLS-HOW TO CONSTRUCT 
FOR ECONOMICAL PLANING. 

I It is not the actual expense of dressing that is the 
■ item of cost in many planing-mills. It is in the hand- 
ling of lumber both to and from the machines. There 
is more money in planing than in sawing if mill and 
machinery is constructed right. 

If a dry kiln is u.sed it should be so set that the 
lumber from kiln cars will stop within three feet of 
.-machine, the feeder taking the stock direct from car. 
I If there is any rejected stuff it is simply dumped off, 
■' where it is laid aside until an accumulation for a sec- 
ond grade. From the planer, lumber is placed on car 
or trucks and carried to shed, car or wharf. If only 
one machifie is used, a rack just aft the machine may 
be employed, where the receiver can place the majority 
of stock right into racks. Everj- machine should have 
} an exhaust fan, well constructed, that is, well made, 
Land set-up pipes. Resaw or siding machine, should 



J 



162 

be set back of planer, and a little to one side, and 
speeded to feed the same as the planer; then the re- 
ceiver can feed the resaw, which product goes out as 
stated. Conveniently and direct aft the planer, say 
twenty feet, should be a neat-sawing cut-off saw with 
a fine-toothed saw. All stock from planer that has a 
defect that would condemn it or place it in a lower 
grade can be trimmed to an even foot and go onto the 
market and meet the most rigid inspection. 

The table of this saw should be at least three inches 
lower than planer, so that the next board or the third 
board would not jam saw in case time was lost, saw, 
when not in use, swinging back clear. 

Rip saw should be between matcher and surfacer, 
if two machines are used, and should be set as far 
ahead as possible by using a long belt. This, as well 
as all the machinery, is driven from line shaft running 
across mill with planers almost directly under it, so 
that slacking the tightener, machine stops without 
diflficulty. Resaw and swing-saw must have a short 
counter shaft, the latter driven by a miter friction. If 
a moulder is to be used, it should be directly off the rip 
saw table, as nearly all its work comes from irregular 
widths in edging boards. The distance between saw 
and moulder in this case would be about thirty feet. 
Lumber to be received from the yard can come in on 
as many tracks as desired, having a turn-table placing 
everything direct to machine. 

To illustrate : Many mills have no car track, using 
teams and delivering stock not near enough but that 
it requires the second handling. Too little attention 
is paid to grading lumber, and the planer man has to 
lose a part of the machine's time in assorting a part of 
this. After going through machine it is rejected 
either from the want of edging, trimming or redressing. 
The culled lumber in front of planer soon accumulates 



163 

and has to be removed, in many cases restacked. The 
culled stuff through planer is thrown down, walked 
over, thrown aside, and sold for what it will go at. I 
will add that a planing-mill with competition cannot 
survive without close inspection, which must come 
right from the saw-mill. Few mills have a standard 
matching gauge, which all associations have adopted. 
This is a good thing for the competent man, but very 
seriously against the man that does not consider it. 
Mr. A. gets a lot of flooring from Mr. B. He lacks a 
little, and calls on Mr. C. for that size. He gets it and 
finds that it will not match; returns it to Mr. C. Not 
that it is not good, well-worked stuff, but it's not up to 
the standard. Some do not adhere to a gauge of their 
own, and soon have a mixture that the cheap man gets 
lumped up for so much, which price may not exceed 
the value of the rough stock before dressing. The south- 
western yellow pine standard admits of the following 
sizes without changing the tongue or groove : Three- 
fourths, thirteen-sixteenths, seven-eighths, one, and one 
and one-sixteenth inches. It is evident that stock that 
will not full-dress any of the heavier sizes can be run 
through the surfacer and brought to the next gauge 
ceiling, three-eighths, one-half, nine-sixteenths, and 
five-eighths inches, without changing tongue or groove. 



J,OG SCALE. 

ROUND LOOS REDUCEDTOIHCH-BOARD MEASURE 

FROM VARIOUS RULES. 
OOYLE RULE.-BOARD MEASURE. 



I,: 






D 


UMBTE 


"■ "" 


u. 








Kt 


« 


i> 


lU 


11 




H 


15 


IB 














































































































































M 


U 




S( 


71 




m 


ISO 







1,. 






a 


AURTBSS. lOC 


es. 








1^ 












22 


23 


2+ 


25 










ItIO 








































































































































2M 








«6 


Ml 


600 





1,. 








DlAK 


ETERB. 


iDcbca 








Ft. 


26 


28 


3U 


3i 


34 


36 




4U 


42 
















































































































































T26 
















2160 




SORiBHIR RULE.-BOARD MEASURE. 





DIAMBTU8. Inclm. 


Ft. 


t 


9 


W 


11 


B 


18 


11 


16 


W 




ts 


22 








ei 


72 



















































































































































[,. 








OtAUK 


TERS. 


nthes. 








fl. 


17 18 


lU 


a. 


21 






a 






























































































































































SB6 







I, 


















1ft. 


28 


27 


2S 


a» 


3U 


31 


m 


as 




H) 

































































































































































r,. 




DIAH 


"T'' 


Inch« 






Ft. 




38 




38 


12 


« 


4S 














7S2 




R2& 






!2 


f^ 


m 


801 










is 


1^ 








































































































Scrib 


ner's 


nd D 


oyle's 


rules 


are 


consi 


iered 


the 



standard. Doyle's rule is used in Scribner's I,umber 



and Log Book. I have measured large logs and find 
that Doyle's rule will not hold out on logs over thirty- 
six inches in diameter. Scribner's rule is the nearest 
right. The latter is nearer right on small logs, while 
Doyle does not give enough. 

This table is computed for thin circular-saws that 
effect a saving in saw kerf. 



LOGS REDUCED TO INCH-BOARD MEASURE. 


1=^ 


-a 


1 


1 


i 


1 


.1 


i 


1 


1 




n 


1 


1 


J '1 


g 


.1 












lb 


w 


18 


19 


21} 


21 




■a 






21 


























m 












































































































































































































































































































































































































sB 










































































































.. 










m 


S« 


SO, 


m 




m 


m 


Bai 


T1t]7B1 


"* 





LOGS REDUCED TO INCH-BOARD MEASURE. 


3'fc 




1 




ill 


I'l 


1 


1 ,1 




.1 


1 


u 


1 




29 


3U 


31 


32 


33 


34 


3!) 


3b 








*U 


41 












































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































ill» 



























187 

Band-saws save ten per cent, over the circular in 
the amount of lumber turned out. The difference in 
saw kerf being fifty per cent., by adding ten percent, 
to log scale, the amount is had accurately. 
TABLE 
Showing the number of feet (board measure) con- 
tained in a piece of joist, scantling or timber, 
of the sizes given below. 



w« 




LI-IHTB 


NT.: 


7 OK 




,BC* 


KTU. 


ci..Nr,T.«ei.B. 






14 




18 


20 


22 


M 


26 


2S 






44 


4S 


2.4 


S 


9" 


11 


12 


"is" 


~w 


Id 


^ 


~^ 


20 


26 


29 


30 


2x9 


12 


14 


16 


18 


20 




24 


26 


28 


30 


41 


4 




2x 8 


IB 






iU 


-^ 






36 


37 


40 








2llU 








SO 


33 








47 


50 








2rf 




3s 




^ 


40 


44 






£g 


m 




8 




3i 




It 




18 


20 


22 








30 








3i 








27 


311 


3X 




39 




1.5 




6 


6B 










M 


4U 


U 




S2 




60 






90 










45 


.W 








70 






110 




3ltl 


3d 






54 








78 




HO 




m 






16 














35 




40 






60 


4x 
















52 




«0 




SB 


90 










4S 




Si 




09 


76 


80 




118 


20 


ill 


4U 


7 




60 




7S 




S7 


93 


100 




14E 




4x1 


48 


66 


M 


72 




SS 




104 


112 


120 








6i 




i 


46 


U 




«6 




rs 




90 


12t 




So 






56 


H 


72 


80 


88 


9tt 


104 


113 


120 


168 


1T( 




8x1 







8U 


90 


100 


110 


lao 


LSO 


140 


150 


2U 


22U 




All 




84 


fl6 


ll>9 


120 


132 






168 






266 


270 




H 




K 


ua 




117 




139 


I4B 




22- 


234 


240 




SD 


93 




la) 


133 


147 




17.1 


187 




281 


m 




Si 


96 


2 


28 


144 


160 


176 




208 


224 










lOxO 


m 


T 


33 


IfiO 


167 


183 






m 


260 






37B 


lUi 










SlO 


220 




260 


280 


SOU 


421 


m 


460 


mi 


« 


B8 


M 


216 


240 


264 




312 


3i6 


360 


6ft 


iS 


6UI 


12»4 


68 


96 


2M 


352 


280 


30B 








420 


6S8 




8311 


!4X4 




229 




294 




3» 


302 


423 


457 




B86 


711 


738 



BELTING— CARE OF. 

HORSE-POWER AND HOW TO SELECT AN EXTRA 
QUALITY. 

The saw and planing-mills are very hard on belt- 
ing, owing to dust collecting and the want of the proper 
man^ement and care. Any belt taxed to Its capacity 



168 

cannot do good work unless its surface is kept a little 
moist with a good belt dressing. Sawdust acts as small 
rollers between belt and pulley. A rubber belt soon 
wears the gum off. No pains should be spared to pro- 
tect belts from dust. The time and power lost by 
tight and slipping belts needs no comparison. Castor- 
oil is about the best dressing that can be used on leather 
and rubber belts, but very little at a time, just suffi- 
cient to keep surface a little damp, but not a sticky 
mass. Do not use rosin in connection, as it will soon 
ruin your belt. A little powdered rosin on a dry belt 
may be used in emergencies, but sparingly. There are 
many belt *' grips " on the market, and but few of them 
will preserve a belt. Tallow may be used sparingly 
on well-scraped or cleaned leather belts. The base of 
nearly all prepared compounds has more or less petro- 
leum or hydrocarbon, which is very injurious to a belt. 
The merit of belt dressing is not in its adhesiveness, 
but in the preservation of the belt. 

SELECTING BELTING. 

We see many tables of testing belting, strained over 
two pullies with weight applied. This is not what the 
purchaser wants, nor has the time to do. The best 
leather belting is made from the central part of the 
hide and contains no flanky leather. Such belting 
when in a coil will show normally the same thickness, 
and not thick and thin parts. The best belting is 
strictly short-lap. If time will permit, a small piece of 
belt put in strong vinegar twenty-four hours will tell 
its quality. If good leather it will maintain nearly its 
thickness ; if not, it will swell and be a spongy mass, 
which shows flanky leather. Rubber belting is not so 
easily detected from appearance. There is more cheap, 
worthless gum belting than leather. The best quality 
vulcanized has a smooth metallic surface and shows no 
small grainy or small indentations or irregularities on 



160 

the surface. Cheap belting shows irregularities in the 
rubber when cut, which shows the composition used 
to imitate the rubber, viz.: old leather charred and 
ground up, mixed with sulphur, magnesia, black lead 
and Parra rubber, which is much cheaper than the 
Java. There are many more ingredients used that 
make up an article fifty to seventy -five per cent, cheaper 
than the genuine. Pure Java rubber shows no irregu- 
larities, has not a dry crumbly appearance. Cheap rub- 
ber belting will not stand much slipping or heat, as the 
rubber will crumble and roll off. The inside of some 
such belting contains a mixture of Cornwall or China 
clay, and soon forms a dry, dusty mass which separates 
the plies, and the belt is gone. I do not, on general 
principles, advocate the stitched rubber belting. The 
first and most serious objection is that more rubber 
must be applied, which, if of a good quality, will tend 
to fracture by showing small checks. A thin metallic 
surface with good rubber between the plies knocks all 
the patent stitched belting out. Genuine rubber belt- 
ing is superior to leather in many ways. Seamless belt- 
ing is the best if of the best quality. 

FASTENING BELTS, LACING HOOKS AND RIVETING. 

The manner of pulling belts together is badly 
botched in many mills. A bad splice or fastening will 
ruin the best belt made. High speed belts must have 
a smooth, even-running joint ; otherwise the thump and 
jar passing over pulleys will soon tear it apart, to say 
nothing of hot bearings and wavy work from planing 
machines. The following engravings show three styles 
of lacing. There are many botch plans which it is not 
necessary to mention. The idea prevails among many 
that two or three lacings through one hole strengthen 
the joint. This is a mistake. Such lacing will soon 
tear out ; if not, the bulky lace wears in two, and that 
is the end of the lace. 



—i 




Fig. I shows a good lace for rubber and leather 
belts. The cut shows that lace is not crossed on either 
side. Dotted Hues show lace on other side. A shows 
a cross-stitch run across belt after lacing is finished. 
This lace has no strain on it and is for preventing wear 
on the lace that holds the belt. This lace is of but one 
thickness, and if a good thin lace, well hammered after 
lacing, it will run very smooth and will remain good 
until belt requires taking up. Holes should be punched 
three-fourths from center to center and one-half from 
end of belt, second row one hole less and one-half from 
first row. 




Fig. 2 shows the best lace for all purposes. It is 
termed the hinge lace, as it passes between end of belt, 
s shown in cut. This is the only lace that will suc- 
.(Kssfully hold cotten-woven and stitched gandy belting. 
"The lace passes alternately between end of belt, thus 
ibrming a clamp which prevents holes from ravelling 
■and pulling out. This lace, as well as Fig. i, is started 
" 1 the centre of belt, starting at ^, passing between 
iCnds of belt, coming through at the letter^, and soon. 
"When this side is finished, lace the other half then run 
the cross-stitch A D, as shown. This lace I have 
ffan for five years without replacing. 

The main belting companies of Chicago say if belt- 
iers would adopt my lace there would be but little com- 
plaint and no more trouble in using cot ton -stitched 
belting. The holes are punched as in Fig. i . using a 
small punch and one-half to five-eighths inch good lac- 
ing. With this lace a very small take-up can be made in 
short belts. Only one row of holes may be cut out ; 
K and by punching the same number back this lace. -n^S-X. 



" pan " out, thus allowing as short as five^ighths inch I 
taking out of a belt. 




This cut shows the standard style of ordinary belt 1 
lacings, being laced two thicknesses, and needs no fur- 
ther explanation. 

Bell hooks, as a general thing, are not the best for J 
fastening belts. Covei's are the only hooks made that 
are reliable. When properly used, they not only make 
a good fastening but the equivalent to an endless belt. 
Leather belts may be cemented if not saturated with 
grease. The ends being neatly scarfed and a good belt 
cement at hand, apply quickly, then put splice under 
heavy pressure in a dry place. The ends of laps may 
be pegged or tacked down until dry, then use a suffi- 
cient number of small head rivets, which makes a 
stronger joint. 

NOTES ON BELTING. 

Don't overtax belts by overloading them or by run- 
ning them tighter than necessary. 

The whole arranger' Hafting and pulleys 



173 

should be under the direction of a mechanical engineer, 
or competent machinist. Destruction of machinery 
and belts, together with unsatisfactory results in the 
business, is a common experience which may, in most 
cases, be traced to a want of knowledge and care in the 
arrangement of the machinery, and in the width and 
style of the belts bought, and in the manner of their 
use, while the manufacturers of the ** outfit" are often 
blamed for bad results which are caused by the faulty 
management of the mill owner himself. 

Having properly arranged the machinery for the 
reception of the belts, the next thing to be determined 
is the length and width of the belts. 

When it is not convenient to measure with the tape- 
line the length required, the following rule will be 
found of ser\dce : Add the diameter of the two pulleys 
together, divide the result by 2, and multiply the 
quotient by 3^, then add this product to twice the dis- 
tance between the centers of the shafts, and you have 
the length required. 

The width of belt needed depends on three condi- 
tions : I. The tension of the belt. 2. The size of 
the smaller pulley, and the proportion of the surface 
touched by the belt. » 3. The speed of the belt. 

The working adhesion of a belt to the pulley will 
be in proportion both to the number of square inches 
of belt contact with the surface of the pulley, and also 
to the arc of the circumference or the pulley touched bj'^ 
the belt. This adhesion forms the basis of all right 
calculation in ascertaining the width of belt necessary 
to transmit a given horse-power. 

In the location of shafts that are to be connected 
with each other by belts, care should be taken to secure 
a proper distance one from the other. It is not easy to 
give a definite rule as to what this distance should be. 
Circumstances generally have much to do with the 



174 

arrangement, and the engineer or machinist must use 
his judgment, making all things conform, as far as may 
be, to general principle$. This distance should be such 
as to allow of a gentle sag to the belt when in motion. 

A general rule may be stated thus : Where narrow 
belts are to be run over small pulleys — 15 feet is a good 
average — the belt having a sag of i >^ to 2 inches. For 
larger belts, working on larger pulleys, a distance of 20 
to 25 feet does well, with a sag of 2 >^ to 4 inches. 
For main belts working on very large pulleys, the 
distance should be 25 to 30 feet, the belts working well 
with a sag of 4 to 5 inches. 

If too great a distance is attempted, the weight of 
the belt will produce a very heavy sag, drawing so hard 
on the shaft as to produce great friction in the bear- 
ings, while at the same time the belt will have an un- 
steady flapping motion, which will destroy both the 
belt and machinery. 

If possible to avoid it, connected shafts should 
never be placed one directly over the other, as in such 
case the belt must be kept very tight to do the work. 
For this purpose belts should be carefully selected of 
well-stretched leather. 

It is desirable that the angle of the belt with the 
floor should not exceed 45°. It is also desirable to lo- 
cate the shafting and machinery so that belts should 
run off" from each shaft in opposite directions, as this 
arrangement will relieve the bearings from the friction 
that would result when the belts all pull one way on 
the shaft. 

The diameter of the pulley should be as large as 
can be admitted, provided they will not produce a speed 
of more than 3,750 feet of belt motion per minute. 
Some authorities limit this speed to 3,000 feet. 

The pulley should be a little wider than the belt 
required for the work. 



176 

The motion of driving should run with and not 
against the laps of the belts. 

Tightening or guide pulleys should be applied to 
the slack side of belts and near the smaller pulley. 

Quick-motion belts should be made as straight and 
as uniform in section and density as possible, and end- 
less if practicable, that is, with permanent joints. 

Belts which run loose, will, of course, last much 
longer than those which must be drawn tightly to drive 
— tightness being evidence of overwork and dispro- 
portion. 

Never add to the work of a belt so much as to over- 
load it. 

The transmitting power of a double belt is to that 
of single belt as lo is to 7. In ordering pulleys, the 
kind of belt to be used should always be specified. 

The strongest part of belt leather is near the flesh 
side, about one-third the way through, from that side. 
It is, therefore, desirable to run the grain (hair) side 
on the pulley, in order that the strongest part of the 
belt may be subject to the least wear. 

The flesh side is not liable to crack, as the grain 
side will do when the belt is old, hence it is better to 
crimp the grain than to stretch it. 

Leather belts run with grain side to the pulley will 
drive 30 per cent, more than if run with flesh side. 
The belt, as well as the pulley, adheres best when smooth, 
and the grain side adheres best because it is smoothest. 

A belt adheres much better and is less liable to slip 
when at a quick speed than at a low speed. Therefore 
it is better to gear a mill with small pulleys and run 
them at a high velocity than with large pulleys and to 
run them slower. A mill thus geared costs less and 
has a much neater appearance than with large, heavy 
pulleys. 

Belts should be kept clean and free from accumu- 



176 

lations of dust and grease, and particularly from con- 
tact with lubricating oils, some of which permanently 
injure leather. 

Leather belts must be well protected against water, 
and even moisture. 

India rubber is the proper substance for belts ex- 
posed to the weather, as it does not absorb moisture 
and stretch and decay. 

Belts should be kept soft and pliable. 

TIGHT BELTS. 

Clamps with powerful screws are often used to put 
on belt with extreme tightness, and with most injuri- 
ous strain upon the leather. They should be very ju- 
diciously used for horizontal belts, which should be 
allowed sufl&cient slackness to move with a loose, un- 
dulating vibration on the returning side, as a test that 
they have no more strain imposed than is necessary 
simply to transmit the power. 

On this subject the following from a New England 
cotton mill engineer, of high reputation and large ex- 
perience, is entitled to careful consideration : 

" I believe that three-quarters of the trouble ex- 
perienced in broken pullies, hot boxes, etc., can be 
traced to the fault of tight belts. The enormous and 
useless pressure thus put upon pulleys must in time 
break them, if they are made in any reasonable pro- 
portions, besides wearing out the whole outfit, and 
causing heating and consequent destruction of the 
bearings. If manufacturers realized how much this 
fault of tight belts cost them, in running their mills, 
probably they would * wake up.' " 

HORSE-POWER OF BELTING. 

To ascertain transmitting power, multiply the di- 
ameter of driving pulley in inches by its number of 
revolutions per minute and this product by width of 



177 

belt in inches ; divide this product by 3,300 for single 
leather, four-ply rubber or four-ply cotton belting — or 
by 2,100 for double leather, six-ply rubber or six-ply 
cotton belting and the quotient will be the number of 
horse-power that can be safely transmitted. 

TO FIND THE LENGTH OF A BELT WHEN CLOSELY 

ROLLED. 

The sum of the diameter of the roll and the eye in 
inches multiplied by the number of turns made by the 
belt, and this product multiplied by the decimal, .1309, 
will equal length of the belt in feet. 

TO FIND THE APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF BELTS. 

Multiply the length of the belt, in feet, by the width 
in inches and divide the product by 13 for single, and 
8 for double belt. 

NOTES ON SHAFTING. 

Shafting must not be too light, neither with bear- 
ings too far apart. For small shafting, bearings should 
be from six to seven feet apart ; and for shafting over 
two and one-fourth inches, eight to nine feet, according 
to amount of work and the pull of belts, which should 
be in opposite directions as much as practicable. 
Where belts pull one way friction is greater and will 
pull shaft out of line. A smaller shaft with bearings 
closer together will consume less power than a larger 
with a longer swing and will develop same power. 
A two-inch shaft with six feet between bearings will 
give as much power as a two and one-half inch with 
ten feet bearings, and consume much less power and 
remain in better line. Do not use burnt or crooked 
shafting because it is fifty per cent, cheaper than new. 
It will consume the difference in power and loss of 
time on every day's run. Buy only the new if a sav- 
ing is to be effected. 



8.1 S,? 












,':;oi- 



179 



.-( .-I .-( (M C^ (M (N (M C^ C^ e*l C^ C<I CO 00 CO 00 CO CO "^ "^ "^ "^ •«< »C lO ? 



O 
p. 



O 






,-( M >M (M (M G^ (M e^ (N d C4 C4 CO 00 eO CO CO CO ^ «1< "^ -^ «6 «0 «0 lO 



iO|« M^^ft^fo Title jfo rifenfo no no >nfO 

-HG<IC^C<l<M©^<MC<l'MC^C0C0C0C0C0C0^'^'^'^»OiO»OiO»O«:> 



3^(M<NC^<NC<IC^C^<N00C0C0C00000"TfTf"^TfiOiOU5»O»O<O«O 



HoD'n^*>^*H'H^«H'-H HBOr***V-<N-P-^ ».4^HW«(ao ».4**i^oflH« •V"i-**«H« >v 

(NC^C^(MC<IC^C<l00C0C0C0C0C0C0"^'^'^'V»O»OiOiOCOCOCOCO (^ 



n(M C^ (M (M C^ CO CO CO 00 CO CO CO -^ Tf Tf "^ "^ »0 »0 »0 ® CO CO CO t^ o 



|to lAiio |co )o Ko Mfo ,jfe ^)h0 1*^ "^^o ^ 

C<l--^C<IC^COCOCOCOOOCOOO^"^'^^'^»OiO»CCOCOCOCOt^t^t^ 'g ^5 

3<IC^COC000C0COCO00COrt<'«*<'«J<TfiCiO»O»OCOCO CO t^ l> t^ 00 00^ 2 5 



H«<«l« -KO.J* iH|«e<9|«ioJ« J«o _te _Ke S SP 

(N W CO CO CO CO CO CO CO "^ '«*' ""i"^ »C lO »0 lO »0 CO CO t^ t> t^ 00 00 00 ^5 



C4|tO ij*0 eo|(0 (QKO lOftD I mo JIB )0 |V lOlt^ 4i *^ 

(M 00 CO CO CO CO CO "^ "Tf •'^ "^ "^ "^ »0 lO »0 »0 CO CO t^ t^ t^ 00 00 00 06 c c 



-q 00 00 00 CO CO Tt< "^ rr -^ •'^ "^ »0 iO «:> lO CO CO CO t^ t^ CO 00 00 Oa Oi . « 

if a 

jw no iOf«o ■» <oiatD !-•»«» -H«o io» ♦* (J 

JO CO CO CO CO CO -^ ''^ -^ ^ ''J^ to 10 lO »0 CO CO CO !>• t^ t^ 00 00 Oi Oi Oi S** 



00C0C0C0C0'^"^"^Tj<rr»OiOi6iOCOCOCOCOt^t^0000OiOaOiOi 



« 



00C0C0C0'^'^Tt<Tt<'^O»0i0i0C0C0COC0t^t^00000a0i0aOO 



« 



ed 



ifitc lOW toj* |«e<x» ^ 

CO CO CO "^ "^ "1< Tf "TJ1 ^ 10 »0 "? to CO CO CO t>« r» 00 00 0> Oi Oi O O O g 

o 



CO CO -^ "^ Tt< "^ ^ tO lO to 10 CO CO CO CO t>« t>« t>« 00 Oi Oi Oi O O O •-" ? 

t. 

eo|« ^l«-,l«» _|eo _,<» •onowfO ^te 4; 

CO ^ Tj< "^ to to »0 lO to to CO CO CO CO t^ t^ 00 00 Oi Oi O O O •-< •-• i-< g 

« 

o to o tootooto 000000000000 0000 00 

(M(MCOCO'^'^tOtOcOI:^OOOiO(M'^COOOOtOOtOOtOOtOO © 

r-l .-I rH r-l .-( C^ 0« CO CO "^ "^ to to CO O 



180 



PULLEYS. 



Every pulley in a mill should be as light as pos- 
sible, consistent with the necessary strength, and be 
in perfect balance. Many of our millers patronize 
near-by machine shops and foundries for all their work, 
where they pay for it by the pound, and they generally 
pay for more than they want, and get poorly balanced 
and badly polished pulleys in the bargain. A number 
of millers have been much irritated at the super- 
fluous iron they havie paid for, and the poor workman- 
ship displayed in ^t fitting. There are now a num- 
ber of establishments in the country making a spe- 
cialty of furnishing finely finished pulleys, light in 
weight, perfect in balance, in either wood, steel, 
wrought iron or cast-iron, and as their prices are as 
low as any, it pays to use such pulleys in the fitting 
of a mill. Makers of special machines, who attain a 
reputation for their goods, and are careful to have 
their machines the lightest running possible, fit them 
with the lightest and best fitted pulleys. It would 
pay to observe this in all pulleys and gears of a mill. 
Power would be saved thereby and power costs money. 

It is not policy to use heavy *' balance" pulleys on 
shafting for a steady motion, as is often practiced. 
The balance pulley will be found in the driving wheel 
of engine, and from that every pulley should be as 
light as possible and as near same size as possible for the 
best results from belts and saving of power. 

VALUABLE INFORMATION FOR MACHINISTS 

AND MILL-MEN. 

The following rule will prove of much value in 
computing exact lengths, speed of pulleys and pe- 
riphery speed of saws in feet per minute : 



181 



RULE TO FIND THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF CIRCLES. 

Multiply the diameter by 3. 141 6 and the product 
will be the circumference. 



Ciroumferenoe of Circles. 



1) 


Oin. 
ft. in. 


1 in. 


2 in. 


Fi. 


ft. 


in. 


ft. in. 








3 1-7 


^ 


1 


3 


n 


3 


4S 


3 8 


2 


6 


n 


6 


«J 


6 9S 


8 


9 


5 


9 


8i 


9 111 


4 


12 


6i 


12 


n 


13 1 


5 


15 


8, 


16 


in 


16 2J 


6 


18 


10 


19 


n 


19 4i 


7 


21 


llj 


22 


3 


22 6i 


8 


26 


IJ 


25 


H 


25 7J 


9 


28 


'^ 


28 


68 


28 9i 


10 


31 


5 


31 


8i 


31 llJ 


11 


34 


6« 


34 


n 


35 0| 


12 


37 


8? 


37 


Hi 


38 2J 


13 


40 


10 


41 


H 


41 4i 


14 


43 


11} 


44 


2J 


44 6 


15 


47 


IJ 


47 


4i 


47 7t 


16 


50 


H 


50 


^ 


50 9| 


17 


53 


41- 


53 


8 


53 Hi 


18 


56 


6i 


56 


n 


57 OJ 


19 


59 


Sk 


59 


nj 


60 2i 


20 


62 


H 


63 


H 


63 4i 


21 


65 


111 


66 


2} 


66 6i 


22 


69 


i| 


69 


4i 


69 7| 


23 


72 


3 


72 


6i 


72 9| 


24 


75 


4} 


75 


n 


75 11 


25 


78 


n 


78 


9} 


79 0} 


26 


81 


H 


81 


Hi 


82 2S 


27 


84 


n 


85 


1 


85 4J 


28 


87 


iij 


88 


H 


88 5} 


29 


91 


n 


91 


n 


91 7i 


80 


94 


'■^i 


94 


6 


94 9J 


31 


97 


4t 


97 


7} 


97 10 


32 


100 


6i 


100 


9i 


101 Of 



3 in. 



4 in. 



ft. 

3 

7 

10 
13 
16 
19 
22 
25 
29 
32 
35 
38 
41 
44 
47 
51 
54 
57 
60 
63 
66 
69 
73 
76 
79 
82 
85 
88 
9J 
95 
98 
101 



in. 

9i 
11 
0} 

2i 
4i 
5i 
7i 
9i 
11 

OS 

2« 
4i 
5} 

7 

10} 
Oi 

2i 
4 

H 

n 
9 

10} 

Oi 

2i 

3i 

5i 

8* 
9 

lOS 

Of 
2 

^ 



ft. 
1 
4 

7 
10 

13 
16 
19 
23 
26 
29 
32 
35 
38 
41 
45 
48 
51 
54 
57 
60 
63 
66 
70 
73 
76 
79 
82 
85 
89 
92 
95 
98 
101 



5 in. 



ft. 
1 
4 
7 

10 
13 
17 
20 
23 
26 
29 
32 
35 
39 
42 
45 
48 
51 
54 
57 
60 
64 
57 
70 
73 
76 
79 
82 
86 
89 
92 
95 
98 

101 



182 



Rule to find the circumference of circles. — Continued. 



6 in. 


7 in. 


ft. 


in. 


ft. 


in. 


1 


6i 


1 


9 


4 


^ 


4 


lit 


7 


lOJ 


8 


li 


10 


Hi 


11 


3 


14 


ll 


14 


H 


17 


3 


17 


H 


20 


4 


20 


H 


23 


6 


23 


11 


26 


26 


114 


29 


10 


30 


li 


32 


11 


33 


^ 


36 


1, 


36 


^ 


39 


3; 


39 


6i 


42 


4J 


42 


8 


45 


H 


45 


9i 


48 


8i 


48 


11« 


51 


10 


52 


1* 


54 


m 


55 


2i 


58 


i« 


58 


^ 


61 


3* 


61 


^ 


H4 


4} 


64 


n 


67 


6J 


67 


H 


70 


8i 


70 


114 


73 


n 


74 


1 


76 


m 


77 


2 


80 


n 


80 


4v 


83 


3 


83 


6, 


fc6 


H 


8G 


n 


89 


6 


89 


^ 


92 


8i 


92 


114 


95 


9i 


96 


oj 


98 


Hi 


99 


2f 


102 


li 


102 


^ 



8 in. 



ft. 
2 
5 
8 
11 
14 
17 
20 
24 
27 
30 
33 
36 
39 
42 
46 
49 
52 
55 
58 
61 
64 
68 
71 
74 
77 
80 
83 
86 
90 
93 
96 
99 
102 



in. 

li 
^ 

7J 

n 

Hi 

li 
2i 

^ 

6i 

7i 

■3 

•Of 
2| 
4J 
6 

7| 
9J 

11 
0} 

24 

44 
5i 

75 

94 
11 

OS 

^ 

4 
5i 

74 



9 in. 



ft. 
2 
5 

8 
11 
14 
18 
21 
24 
27 
30 
33 
36 
40 
43 
46 
49 
52 
55 
58 
62 
65 
68 
71 
74 
77 
80 
84 
87 
90 
93 
96 
99 
102 



in. 
44 

64 



11 

Of 

2| 

44 
5i 

74 
94 

m 

Of 
24 
4 

5J 
7f 

94 
10} 

04 
24 

3J 
51 
74 
9 

lOf 

Oi 

24 
3J 

54 

7} 

84 
10| 



10 in. 



ft. 
2 
4 
8 
12 
15 
18 
21 
24 
27 
30 
34 
37 
40 
43 
46 
49 
52 
56 
59 
62 
65 
68 
71 
74 
78 
81 
84 
87 
90 
93 
96 
100 
103 



in. 

7| 
9 

lOf 

5J 

2i 

^ 

5i 

9 
111 



2f 

^ 
^ 

7i 

8 J 

lOJ 

Oi 
2 

3f 

5| 
7 



04 

IJ 

3J 

^A 

Sf 
0| 
10 

If 



11 in. 



ft. 
2 
6 
9 

12 
15 
18 
21 
24 
28 
31 
34 
37 
40 
43 
46 
50 
53 
56 
59 
62 
65 
68 
71 
75 
78 
81 
84 
87 
90 
93 
97 
100 
103 



in. 
lOJ 

24 

14 

3f 
54 

74 

8f 
lOf 

04 

If 

34 

54 

64 

H 
114 



ll 

34 

54 

6f 
84 

104 
114 

It 

34 

5 

6| 
8i 

114 

114 

14 

34 

44 



SHOKT RULK TO FIND THE AREA OF CIRCIyES. — Mul- 
tiply j4 the circumference by the radius and the prod- 
uct will be the area. 



183 



STRENGTH AND TENSION OF IRON. 

The breaking strength of good American iron is 
usually taken at 50,000 lbs. per square inch, with an 
elongation of 15 per cent, before breaking. It should 
not set under a strain of less than 25,000 lbs. The 
proof strain is 20,000 lbs. per square inch, and beyond 
this amount iron should never be strained in practice. 

WEIGHT AND STRENGTH OF SHORT-LINK IRON 

CHAINS. 

" Since each link consists of two thicknesses of bar, 
it might be supposed that a chain would possess dou- 
ble the strength of a single bar ; but the strength of 
the bar becomes reduced about 3-10 by being formed 
into links, so that the chain really has but about 7-10 
of the strength of two bars. As a thick bar of iron 
will not sustain as heavy a load in proportion as a 
thinner one, so, of course, large chains are propor- 
tionately weaker than smaller ones. In the following 
table, 20 tons (gross) per square inch is assumed as 
the average breaking strain of a single straight bar of 
ordinary rolled iron i inch in diameter; 19 tons, from 
I to 2 in. dia.; and 18 tons, from 2 to 3 in. dia. De- 
ducting 3-10 from each of these, we have as the break- 
ing strain of the two bars composing each link as fol- 
lows : 14 tons per sq. inch, up to i inch in diameter ; 
13.3 tons, from i to 2 in. and 12.6 tons, from 2 to 3 in. 
diameter; and upon these assumptions the table is 
based." 



184 



TABLE OF WEIGHTS AND STRENGTH OF SHORT- 
LINK IRON OHAINS. 



Diameter 


Averag:e 


Breaking: 


Diameter 


Average 


Breaking 


of 


Weight per 


Strain. 


of 


Weight per 


Strain. 


Iron 


Foot. 




Iron. 


Foot. 




Ins. 


lybs. 


lybS. 


Ins. 


I/bs. 


lybs. 


3-i6 


.42 


1,731 


I 


10. 


49,280 


% 


.91 


3,069 


I-I6 


1 1.3 


52,790 


5-1 6 


1.22 


4,794 


'A 


12.5 


59,226 


% 


1-5 


6,922 


3-16 


14. 


65,960 


7-16 


2. 


9,408 


Va 


15.5 


73,114 


% 


2.5 


12,320 


^ 


18.5 


88,301 


9-16 


3.2 


15,590 


y^ 


22. 


105,280 


V^ 


4.1 


19,219 


^8 


25.5 


123,514 


II-I6 


5. 


23,274 


Va 


29.5 


143,293 


Ya 


5.8 


27,687 


n 


33-5 


164,505 


13-16 


6.6 


32,307 


2 


38. 


187,152 


n 


7-7 


37,632 


% 


48.5 


224,448 


15-16 


8.9 


43,277 


% 


60. 


277,088 



TABLE OF TRANSMISSION OF POWER BY WIRE 



Showing necessary size and speed of wheels and 
rope to obtain any desired amount of power, (Roeb- 
ling.) 



- - .- 


? 


_"" 


.r._.- 


'^^. - 


— 1 


__-^r= 


- 


°s 




¥ 


"=£ 







u 


C.5 


i 


£ 


l' 


^■2 


H 


1 


11 






E 




= 3 


t^ 






■f 


■q 


i 


=1 


f 


i 


1 


4 


80 


H 


3.3 


10 


SO 


ii.ie 


5S.4 




100 


H 


4.1 




100 


11.16 


73. 




320 


H 


2. 




120 


11.16 


87.6 




140 


H 


5.8 




140 


11.16 


102.2 


6 


80 


7-18 


6,» 


11 


80 


11.10 


75.5 




100 


7-16 


8.6 




100 


11.18 


94.4 




120 


7-16 


10.3 




120 


11.16 


113.3 




140 


7-16 


12.1 




156 


11.16 


132.1 


6 


80 


'A 


10.7 


12 


80 


H 


99.3 




100 


'A 


13.4 




100 


U 


124.1 




120 


•A 


16.1 




120 


H 


148,9 




140 


H 


18.7 




140 


% 


173.7 


7 


80 


9-16 


18.9 


13 


80 


H 


122.6 




100 


9-16 


21.1 




100 


X 


153.2 




120 


9-16 


25.3 




120 


H 


183.9 


K 


80 


^ 


22. 


14 


80 


H 


146. 




100 


H 


27.5 




100 


'A 


185. 




120 


H 


33. 




120 


H 


222. 


9 


80 


H 


41.5 


15 


80 


'A 


217. 




100 


H 


51.9 




100 


V» 


259. 




120 


U 


62.2 




120 


n 


300. 



NOTES ON THE USES OP WIRE ROPE.-Rwbllng. 

Two kinds of wire rope are manufactured. The 
most pliable variety contains ig wires in the strand, 
and is generally used for hoisting and running rope. 

For safe working load, allow 1-5 of 1-7 of the ulti- 
mate strength, according to speed, so as to get good 
wear from the rope. Wire rope is as pliable as new 



186 

hemp rope of the same strength ; but the greater the 
diameter of the sheaves the longer wire rope will last. 

Experience has proved that the wear increases with 
the speed. It is, therefore, t)etter to increase the load 
than the speed. Wire rope must not be coiled or un- 
coiled like hemp or manilla — all untwisting or kinking 
must be avoided. 

In no case should galvanized rope be used for run- 
ning. One day's use scrapes oflf the zinc coating. 

STRENGTH OF MANILLA AND HEMP ROPES. 

**The strength of rope is very irregular, much 
depending on the quality of the fibre used and the 
soHdity in which the rope is put together. For 
instance, 3^-inch circumference ^^-laid rope will 
not measure over 3-inch circumference Aard-laid 

• " Our tests of the various makes of rope from the 
manilla fibre show about the following average 
maximum strength : 

3-inch cir. soft-laid, 7,300 lbs. 

3-inch ** medium-laid, 8,000 " 
3-inch " hard-laid, 9,000 " 

PRACTICAL CONSIDERATIONS. 

First. Do not tax belts by overloading. 

Second. Shafting and pulleys should be arranged 
by a competent machinist or mechanical engineer. 

Third. Rules for finding length of belt : " Add the 
diameter of the two pulleys together, divide the result 
by two and multiply the quotient by three and one- 
seventh, then add this product to twice the distance 
between the center of the shafts." 

Fourth. In locating shafts, great care should be 
taken to secure proper distance. Experts give the 
following rules : First. — When narrow belts are to be 
run over small pulleys, fifteen feet is good average, 
the belt having a sag of one and one-half to two inches. 



187 

Second. — For longer belts working on larger pulleys, 
a distance of twenty to twenty-five feet does well with 
a sag of four or five inches. 

Fifth. The angle of a belt with the floor should not 
exceed forty-five degrees. 

Sixth. The pulley should be a little wider than the 
belt required for the work. 

Seventh. The strongest part of belt leather is the 
flesh side. 

Eighth. Always run the grain (or hair) side on the 
pulley. The grain side to pulley gives greater driv- 
ing power, hugs the pulley closer, less liable to slip, 
and will drive thirty per cent, more than flesh side. 

Ninth. Keep your belts free from the accumula- 
tion of dust or grease, or oil drippings. They will in- 
jure the leather. 

Tenth. Keep your belt soft and pliable by using 
a good belt dressing. 

Eleventh. Rule to find the horse-power that any 
given width of double belt is easily capable of driving. 

Multiply the number of square inches covered by 
the belt on the driven pulley by one and one-half the 
speed in feet per minute through which the belt moves, 
and divide the product by 33,000, the quotient will be 
the horse-power. 

Twelfth. To find the width of belt for any given 
horse-power : Multiply 33,000 by the horse-power re- 
quired and divide the product first by the length in 
inches covered by the belt on the driven pulley and 
again by half the speed of the belt. 

Thirteenth. Rule for piecing a belt when pulleys 
are changed : One and one-half times the difference of 
the diameter of the pulleys will give the required 
piece. 

Fourteenth. Tighteners. — The tightening pulley 
is applied to belts for increasing their adhesion to 



188 

the pulleys, and as this is to fall first on the smaller 
pulley it is usual to place them on the slack side of 
the belt, nearer this pulley, in order to increase adhe- 
sion as well as the area of contact. It also increases 
the friction of driving in proportion to the thrusting 
of the same from the line of its natural curvature. 

Fifteenth. Rules for calculating the speed of pul- 
leys : 

Problem i . — The diameter of the driver and driven 
being given to find the number of revolutions of the 
driven, Rule : Multiply the diameter of the driver by 
its number of revolutions, and divide the product by 
the diameter of the driven ; the quotient will be the 
number of revolutions. 

Problem 2. — The diameter and revolutions of the 
driver being given to find the diameter of the driven, 
that shall make any g:iven number of revolutions in 
the same time, Rule: Multiply the diameter of the 
driver by its number of revolutions and divide the 
product by the number of revolutions of the driven ; 
the quotient will be the diameter. 

Problem 3. — To find the size of the driver. Rule: 
Multiply the diameter of the driven by the number of 
revolutions you wish to make and divide the product 
by the revolutions of the driver ; the quotient will be 
the size of the driver. 

RULES FOR ENGINEERS AND FIREMEN ON THE 
CARE AND MANAGEMENT OF STEAM BOILERS. 

The care of steam boilers, and the qualifications of 
engineers in the management of same, has resulted in 
a general movement in several States towards requir- 
ing engineers to prove themselves competent before 
being put in charge of steam boilers, and it originates 
from a desire to grapple with an evil which is a con- 
tinual source of danger to the people. If steam users 



189 

could be trusted to employ only competent attendants 
to their boilers, there would be no necessity for the 
law infringing their personal liberty so far as to say 
who shall not be left in charge ; but unfortunately 
many steam users are extremely reckless in this mat- 
ter, as numerous fatal explosions have testified. 

The laws that require the examination and license 
of persons who act as engineers, are enacted for the 
protection of life and property, from loss or damage, 
by the explosion of boilers or tanks under pressure. 
Hence it follows that the law-makers had no intent to 
provide that the license should be evidence of the skill 
of the holder as an engineer ; that is a matter that only 
concerns his employer. The State deals only with 
that which threatens the safety of persons or commu- 
nities. The license is only evidence that the person 
to whom it is issued can care for and run safely a steam 
boiler. That is as far as the State can go without in- 
terfering with the rights of individuals. It is no affair 
of the State, does not concern it to know or certify that 
a man can adjust or set valves, can take down or erect 
an engine, produce power with the least consumption 
of fuel, or be able to use the indicator intelligently ; 
these are all matters that concern only the steam user. 
But when the use and safety of a boiler is considered, 
the State has the undoubted right to say that the per- 
son who is to take charge of this dangerous device 
shall possess sufl5cient skill and experience to insure 
safety for operators in the mill, also for citizens living 
in the vicinity. It follows, then, that the examination 
for license can only refer to the boiler and the appli- 
ances that will insure its safety. 

Every engineer and fireman ought to know per- 
fectly well, without the necessity of any elaborate cal- 
culations or theorizing, what results will ensue should 
he overload his steam engine, his boiler, or any of the 



190 

machinery under his charge, and he would not be 
compelled to call in the services of some expert en- 
gineer to tell him clearly and concisely what would 
occur under such conditions. He would know that in 
the vast majority of cases he would be subjecting him- 
self to the possibility — in fact, high probability — of a 
speedy break-down, and, before that event actually 
transpired, to endless trouble of every description, all 
the result of poor judgment, or unfortunate necessity, 
which led him to work his boiler, engine or machinery 
up to double, or perhaps treble, what it was intended 
for. 

Every applicant for an engineer's license should be 
prepared to answer all questions that will show that 
he is mentally well equipped to provide against possi- 
ble disaster. He should be well skilled in the con- 
struction, care and manipulation of pumps, injectors, 
inspirators, all the devices by which the boiler is sup- 
plied with water. He should be familiar with the use 
of the gauges in use for determining pressure of steam, 
or the quantity of water in the boiler. The safety- 
valve should be under his care, always ready to per- 
form its functions. Then he should have some idea of 
the difference between fibrous and crystallized iron ; 
should be able to tell when a boiler had become weak, 
needed repairs and have the courage to say so, and refuse 
to fire it. He should have skill sufl5cient to enable him 
to frequently inspect the boiler, and determine if the 
factor of safety is enough to insure absolute safety. 
He should be able to take such care of the boiler that large 
or dangerous deposits of scale or mud are not possible ; 
also, should know what to do when '' priming" or " foam- 
ing" is evident. He should inform himself as to the 
effects of corrosion, internal scale and deposits, improper 
setting, impeded circulation and improper steam and 
water connections. 



191 

HINTS TO ENGINEERS. 

There are engineers and engineers — one may be 
dear at $i8 per week, another cheap at $25 per week. 
This point will be bevSt appreciated by those who are 
most conversant with the subject. Having spent 
thousands of dollars in buildings, and fitting up a mill 
or factory with modern machinery adapted to your 
business, is it good management to intrust its care to 
the cheapest engineer you can obtain ? 

Instances of this kind are of almost daily occur- 
rence ; many result very disastrously. Most of them 
are such expensive experiments that they are never 
repeated by the same party. Within certain well-de- 
fined limits the best is the cheapest. Don't let a few 
dollars prevent your employing the most competent 
man, one who, knowing his ability and experience, 
may seem to you to be too high priced. 

We are often reminded that all things constructed 
by human hands are imperfect ; those imperfections in- 
crease with age and use. It would effect an impor- 
tant saving in repairs, with greatly increased efficiency 
and durability of machinery and tools, if regular days — 
if possible, twice in each year, the time regulated by 
the dull season of the particular business in which you 
are engaged, when the machinery should be stopped 
and needful repairs, alterations and improvements be 
made. 

There may be, perhaps, many engineers who do 
not desire any information on the care of boilers, while 
others are only too glad to receive it. The former 
might decline to gratify the less experienced by im- 
parting knowledge for the benefit of others, and some 
refrain from asking questions for fear of showing their 
inexperience. Such considerations should not weigh 
where men desire to advance themselves. 

A poorly constructed boiler in charge of an intelli- 



192 

gent engineer is safer with eighty pounds of steam 
than a well-constructed boiler in the hands of a reck- 
less and ignorant man is with forty pounds ! 

Many defects in boilers can be attributed to the 
want of care on the part of the engineer. 

A boiler should be washed at least once a month, 
removing all hand-hole and man-hole plates, freeing 
the legs of dirt and sediment, being particular about the 
back leg, if the boiler is of the locomotive style ; should 
there be no hand-hole, then have one put in as soon 
as possible. Examine the boiler inside, and be sure 
that no braces are out of place and no pins backed out. 
Take the grate bars out and paint the legs with red- 
lead and oil ; this will prevent scales or dirt from form- 
ing on the outside. 

All water used for wetting ashes, also the leader 
from gauge-cocks dripping in ash-pan, has a tendency 
to weaken the legs by corrosion to a great extent. 

Before letting cold water in after blowing out a 
boiler, allow two hours, at least, for a contraction to 
take place slowly. 

In replacing the hand-hole plates be sure the gas- 
kets are properly fitted, cutting off all overhanging 
edges; also whitelead the plate so the gasket will hold 
to it. This will prevent the use of new gaskets every 
time the plates are taken out. 

In setting up the plate, use an ordinary screw- 
wrench, and see that the crow-feet do not bring up 
on the plate. A six-foot wrench will not make the 
plate tight if not properly replaced. 

Never foroe fires in getting up steam from cold water. 

Slow fires are best. 

Do not make a race between fire and iron to see 
which is the most durable. 

A good en^neer will not brag on getting up steam 
from cold water in twenty minutes. 



193 

Remember ! the steam boiler is a good servant in 
the hands of an intelligent master. 

Do not condemn any appliance introduced osten- 
sibly for the purpose of securing economy or safety 
without giving it a fair trial, as some of the most valu- 
able inventions now in use were ridiculed and rejected 
when first introduced. Many excellent " devices" 
have been condemned by those having the care of them, 
and replaced by others at great expense to the owners 
of boilers and engines. 

Donotdiscountenanceanydevice, invention, adjunct 
or arrangement that will lessen your labor, induce 
economy, and at the same time give a guarantee of 
safety. Give everything placed in your charge by 
your employer a fair, impartial trial. 

Do not allow the boiler-head to become filthy or 
the gauge-cocks to leak and become covered with mud 
and the salts resulting from impurities in the water, 
as this would furnish strong evidence of slovenliness. 

Do not let anything connected with the boiler in 
your charge run from bad to worse, with the idea that 
at some certain time you will have a general over- 
hauling and repairing, because an accident may occur 
at any moment, involving serious loss of life and prop- 
erty. 

Do not neglect to have the boiler insured when 
practicable, as insurance is generally accompanied by 
intelligent inspection, which furnishes a guarantee of 
safety to the engineer, owner or steam user. 

Do not reject the advice or suggestions of intelli- 
gent boiler inspectors, as their experience enables them 
to discriminate in cases which never come under the 
observation of persons of a different calling or pursuit. 



194 

THE FOLLOWING RULES FOR ENGINEERS AND FIRE- 
MEN HAVE BEEN ADOPTED BY THE HARTFORD 
STEAM BOILER INSPECTION AND INSUR- 
ANCE COMPANY. 

1. Condition of Water. — The first duty of an 
engineer when he enters his boiler-room in the morn- 
ing is to ascertain how many gauges of water there 
are in his boilers. Never unbank nor replenish the fires 
until this is done. Accidents have occurred, and many 
boilers have been entirely ruined from neglect of this 
precaution. 

2. Low Watek. — In case of low water, immedi- 
ately cover the fires with ashes, or, if no ashes are at 
hand, use fresh coal. Don't turn on the feed under 
any circumstances, nor tamper with, or open the safety- 
valve. Let the steam outlets remain as they are. 

3. In Cases of Foaming.— Close throttle, and 
keep closed long enough to show true level of water. 
If that level is sufficiently high, feeding and blowing 
will usually suffice to correct the evil. In cases of vio- 
lent foaming, caused by dirty water, or change from 
salt to fresh, or vice versa, in addition to the action 
above stated, check draft and cover fires with fresh 
coal. 

4. Leaks. — When leaks are discovered they 
should be repaired as soon as possible. 

5. Blowing Off. — Blow down, under a pressure 
not exceeding 10 pounds. Where surface blow-cocks 
are used, they should be often opened for a few mo- 
ments at a time. The blow-ofi"- valve should be opened 
wide once a day, oftener if the water contains much sedi- 
ment. The time required to open wide and close the 
valve is long enough. 

6. Filling up the Boiler. — After blowing down 
allow the boiler to become coolh^ior^ filling again. Cold 
water, pumped into hot boilers, is very injurious from 
sudden contraction. 



195 

7- Exterior of B011.ER. — Care should be taken 
that no water comes in contact with the exterior of the 
boiler, either from leaky joints or other causes. 

8. Removing Deposit and Sediment. — In tubular 
boilers the hand-holes should be often opened, and all 
collections removed from over the fire. Also, when 
boilers are fed in front and blown off through the same 
pipe, the collection of mud or sediment in the rear 
end should be often removed. 

9. Safety- Vai^ves. — Raise the safety-valves cau- 
tiously and frequently, as they are liable to become 
fast in their seats, and useless for the purpose intended. 

10. Safety-Valves and Pressure- Gauge. — 
Should the gauge at any time indicate the limit of pres- 
sure allowed, see that the safety-valves are blowing off. 

1 1 . Gauge-Cocks. Glass Gauge. — Keep gauge- 
cocks clear and in constant use. Glass gauges should 
not be relied on altogether. 

12. Blisters. — When a blister appears there 
must be no delay in having it carefully examined, and 
trimmed or patched as the case may require. 

13. Clean Sheets. — Particular care should be 
taken to keep sheets and parts of boilers exposed to 
the fire perfectly clean, also all tubes, flues and con- 
nections well swept. This is particularly necessary 
where wood or soft coal is used for fuel. 

14. General Care of Boilers and Connec- 
tions. — Under all circumstances keep the gauges, 
cocks, etc., clean and in good order, and things gener- 
ally in and about the engine and boiler-room in a neat 
condition. 

The foregoing Rules and Hints to Engineers should 
be referred to daily. 

By their careful observance, economy of fuel and 
the durability and safety of the boiler are attained. 
Through their neglect, waste, frequent and expensl^^ 



196 

repairs and danger are the certain results. These con- 
siderations are important, and should not be lost sight 
of. Boilers are expensive to buy and run, and it would 
seem natural that owners should strive by proper care 
to make the other expenses attending their use as 
small as possible. That this in too many instances is 
not done is very evident, and those at fault pay well 
for their neglect. There is another important fact to 
be considered, however, and that is, that want of care 
is the cause of explosion. There is no mystery about 
it, and no man has the right to imperil the lives and 
property of others by his carelessness. In running 
steam boilers it would be well to 

Remejnber that it is no excuse for an engineer or 
fireman not to improve himself in the duties of his 
calling, because his present situation is not agreeable 
or his pay not remunerative, or his employer does not 
treat him kindly. Such circumstances should stimu- 
late him in his efforts to acquire knowledge, instead of 
causing him to become a laggard, as his opportunity 
will undoubtedly come, and how can he expect to make 
a better change, or get a better position unless he pre- 
pares himself beforehand to fill it, and also to 

Remember that it is absurd for an engineer or fire- 
man to expect to fill a good position, command good 
wages, and secure the confidence and respect of his 
employers, unless he can show that he has made the 
object of his calling the subject of investigation and 
study. There are thousands who are always ready 
and willing to fill good positions, if they could be only 
accorded a short time to prepare themselves, which of 
course would be impracticable and unreasonable. 

With a knowledge of the foregoing requisites for 
the safety of steam boilers an engineer should be fa- 
miliar, and examiners will do well to see that those 
who procure license to care for boilers, have the knowl- 



197 

edge to exercise that care, with every assurance of 
safety for those whose business or necessities require 
them to work, dwell or visit in the vicinity of these 
dangerous store-houses of potential energy. 

TESTING STEAM BOILERS. 

Every steam boiler, for whatever purpose employed, 
ought to be opened, cleaned, thoroughly examined and 
tested at least once a year. The sound test is the most 
reliable in cases where it can be applied as the eye 
and the ear can be employed to discover the character 
and occasion of those defects, which the sound of the 
hammer, when brought in contact with the material, 
discloses. The hydraulic test can be employed in cases 
where it would be impossible to attempt the sound test, 
and is of great value when intelligently applied ; but 
its application should be under the control of intelli- 
gent persons, as a reckless use of the hydraulic test 
may result in injury to the boiler, as it doubtless has 
ruined a good many. 

EXTERNAL CORROSION. 

All boilers should be arched over, allowing at least 
fifteen to twenty inches space between the boiler and 
brick-work. This will protect them from any external 
corrosion from valves, flange joints qr any other leak- 
age over the boiler, and any leaks from the shell of the 
boiler can be seen by looking under the arch. The 
arching will have a great tendency to dry the steam. 
No ashes or lime should be kept next the boiler, 
where the water from leakages from steam pipes would 
fall on it and form a lye which would corrode the iron. 

SCALE AND CORROSION IN BOILERS. 

We find that there are very few steam users, or even 
those placed in charge of the steam boiler, as engineer, 
who fully understands the great danger of running 
steam boilers without proper care. In our experience 



198 

as boiler inspectors, we have very frequently found 
boilers in which the iron had wasted away two-thirds 
of its original thickness from corrosion, and even the 
rivet-heads in whole seams had disappeared, leaving 
no margin of safety. In most cases this danger is not 
seen, even in a close inspection of the boilers, unless 
th^ engineer or inspector understands his business 
thoroughly, as the iron is covered by a crust or scale, 
probably of sufficient thickness to cause a weakness of 
the iron plate, even if it was not affected otherwise. 
This agent of destruction in a boiler, called corrosion, 
inN^ariably eats away the iron more rapidly when cov- 
ered over by a non-conducting boiler scale. If no scale 
existed the action of the water would come in direct 
contact with the iron, and would, to some extent, pre- 
vent the corrosive action. 

Almost ever>- engineer has his own remedy for 
boiler scale ; among which may be mentioned slippery- 
elm, flax-seed, bass-wood, oak blocks, witch-hazel, coal- 
oil, buckwheat. Indian meal, saw-dust, molasses, gal- 
\-anic batteries and boiler fluids. 

But an article manufactured by G. W. Lord, Phil- 
adelphia. Pa„ known as Lord's Boiler Compound, ap- 
pears to be the only chemical preparation in use, at 
the present day. that will prevent the formation of 
scale, or xx»t. soften and remove it after it has been 
formed, in any class of boilers, without more or less 
injurv' to the iron, as it neutralizes the action of the 
natural cher.::oa' salts which form the basis of all scale 

We also f.r.d :h:s article unanimously endorsed by 
authors of mechauioal books, enkr^ner^r^ in charge of 
works, practical chemists and nten having large capi- 
tal in\-estevt in stean: boilers, as a remecy :or corrosion, 
snoh as rittir.g ai:i \\-asting o: iron, which causes so 
ziinv exr^lotsions. And w>e mnst bear in mind Uiat 



199 

this trouble, at least, cannot possibly be overcome by 
any mechanical means. 

DIRECTIONS FOR SETTING UP PUMPS. 

Never use pipes of a smaller size than given in the 
tables ; when long pipes are used, it is necessary to in- 
crease the diameter to allow for the increased friction, 
especially in regard to suction pipes. » 

Use as few turns and angles on pipes as possible, 
and run every pipe in as direct a line as practicable. 
Bends, returns and angles increase friction more rap- 
idly than length of pipe. 

See to it that the pump has a full supply of water. 

In pumping very hot water, always flood your pump 
by placing it so that it will be supplied from a head. 

A gallon of water (U. S. standard) weighs 8^ pounds, 
and contains 231 cubic inches. 1 

A cubic foot of water weighs 62^ pounds, and con- 
tains 1,728 cubic inches, or jyi gallons. 

Doubling the diameter of a pipe increases its capac- 
ity four times. 

Friction of liquids in pipes increases as the square 
of the velocity. \ 

Each nominal horse-power of boilers requires 30 
to 35 pounds of water per hour. 

To find the area of a piston, square the diameter 
and multiply by .7854. 

To find the pressure in pounds per square inch of 
a column of water, multiply the height of the column 
in feet by .434. 

To find the capacity of a cylinder in gallons, mul- 
tiply the area in inches by the length of stroke in inches 
will give the total number of cubic inches ; divide this 
amount by 231 (which is the cubical contents of a gal- 
lon in inches), and product is the capacity in gallons. 

Ordinary speed to run pumps is 100 feet of piston 
per minute. 



200 

To find quantity of water elevated in one minute 
running at loo feet of piston per minute, square the 
diameter of water cylinder in inches and multiply by 
4. Example : Capacity of a five-inch cylinder is de- 
sired. The square of the diameter (5 inches) is 25, 
which, multiplied by 4, gives 100, which is gallons per 
minute (approximately). 

To find the horse-power necessary to elevate water 
to a given height, multiply the total weight of column 
of water in pounds by the velocity per minute in feet, 
and divide the product by 33,000 (an allowance of 
twenty-five per cent, should be added for friction, etc.). 

INSTRUCTIONS TO ENGINEERS. 

Getting up Steam. — Before lighting the fire in the 
morning, raise your safety valve, brushing away all 
the ashes and dust which may impair its free action, 
and if it leaks steam grind it on its seat with fine em- 
ery or grindstone grit. Valves with vibratory stems 
are safer than those with rigid stems, as they are not 
so liable to bind by the lever and weight getting out 
of true. To guard against loss by leakage and evapo- 
ration, leave the water up to the third gauge at night 
and keep it up to the second gauge during working 
hours. Clean all ashes and cinders from the furnace 
and ash-pit, and spread a layer of two or three inches 
of coal over the grate bars ; pile on plenty of shavings 
over the coal, with dry sawdust, split wood, etc., then 
start your fire. Keep the fire even and regular over 
the grate-bars, about 5 inches thick with soft coal, and 
about 3 inches with anthracite, and always avoid ex- 
cessive firing. Moderate charges or firings at intervals 
of 15 to 20 minutes give the best results. In getting 
up steam from cold water the fire should be raised 
gradually, to avoid damaging the boiler by unequal 
expansion of the iron. Do not keep the damper and 
furnace door open at the same time, as the extreme 



* 201 

draught expels the heat from the furnace into the 
chimney, and the cold air entering through the door 
induces a damaging contraction of the boiler plates 
wherever it strikes. The current of air enters the 
ash-pit with a velocity of 12 feet per second, and every 
100 lbs. of coal requires about 15.525 cubic feet for its 
combustion. With wood for fuel, the area of grate 
surface should be 1.25 to 1.4 that for coal. Volume of 
furnace for coal burning should be from 2.75 to 3 cubic 
feet for every square foot of its grate surface, for wood 
4.6 to 5 cubic feet. The use of the pyrometer has sat- 
isfactorily established the following facts : ist. That 
the admission of a certain quantity of air behind the 
bridge develops a greater amount of heat for raising 
steam by assisting combustion and consuming the 
smoke, the existence of smoke being always a sure 
sign of waste. 2. A regular continuous supply of air 
to the furnace increases its heating powers 33/^ per 
cent. 3. The supply of air may enter behind the 
bridge, through the bars, or through the furnace doors, 
as long as it is properly regulated. 4. The supply of 
air may vary with the nature of the fuel ; light burn- 
ing coal requiring less air than caking coal, because 
the latter becomes a compact mass in the furnace, ex- 
cluding the air from the bars, while the latter is the 
reverse. 5. For perfect combustion a high tempera- 
ture is necessary. In all cases see that the bars are 
well covered and the fuel kept from caking. Knock 
away the clinkers as soon as formed, keeping the 
spaces open between the bars. Regulate the supply 
of air either by the dampers, ash-pit, furnace doors or by 
an orifice behind the bridge. A jet of steam from a 
pipe placed across the top of, and inside the door, will 
greatly assist in consuming the smoke and intensifying 
the heat, by yielding up its oxygen and hydrogen. 
If steam commences to blow off at the safety-valve 



202 • 

while the engine is at rest, start your pump or injector 
to create a circulation, cover or bank your fire with a 
charge of ashes or fresh coal to absorb the heat, and 
allow the steam to have free egress through the safety- 
valve. If by neglect the water gets very low, and the 
boiler dangerously hot, the fire should either be drawn 
or drenched with water. Should the fire be very hot 
and the water supply temporarily cut off, stop the en- 
gine and cover the fire quite thickly with fresh ftiel to 
absorb the heat, keeping the usual allowance of water 
in the boiler until the supply is renewed. Boilers 
should be blown out every two or three weeks, or as 
often as mud appears in the water, but never until 
after the fire has been drawn at least one hour, and 
the damper closed, otherwise the empty boiler might 
be damaged by the heat. Never fill a hot boiler with 
cold water, as the sudden contraction many times re- 
peated will eventually cause it to leak. Never blow 
out a boiler with a higher pressure than 50 lbs. to the 
square inch, as steam at a high pressure indicates a 
high temperature in the iron, which under careftd 
management should be always let down gradually. 
Previous to filling a boiler, raise the valve to permit 
the free egress of the air which might otherwise do 
manifold damage. 

Use every possible* precaution against using foul 
water, as it induces foaming in the boiler ; soapy or 
oily substances and an insufiiciency of steam room 
have a like effect, causing the boiler to bum on the 
spots where the water is lifted from it, and the glass 
gauges to indicate falsely, besides damaging the cylin- 
der by priming, carrying mud, grit, water and slush 
into it through the pipe, and rendering the cylinder- 
heads liable to be knocked out. Steam from pure wa- 
ter at 212° Fahr. supports a 30-inch column of mer- 
cury. Steam from sea, or impure water at the same 
temperature, will support only 22 inches. 



203 

Pure soft water derived from lakes and large streams, 
rain-water from cisterns, reservoirs, etc., and springs 
outside of limestone districts ^ is the best for steam pur- 
poses. Water from wells and spifngs in limestone dis- 
tricts and small streams hold in solution large quan- 
tities of chloride of sodium, carbonate of lime, sulphate 
of lime, etc., besides quantities of vegetable matter in 
suspension. The carbonic acid in the water, which 
holds the carbonate of lime, etc., in solution, being 
driven off by boiling, the latter is precipitated and forms 
an incrustation which adheres with obstinate tenacity 
toithe boiler-plates. By continual accretion the deposit 
of scale becomes thicker and thicker, and being a non- 
conductor of heat it requires 60 per cent, more fuel 
to raise the water to any given temperature when the 
scale is % of an inch thick ; the conducting power of 
scale compared with that of iron being as i to 37. 
The red scale formed from water impregnated with salts 
of iron, derived from percolation through iron ore, is 
still more destructive to steam boilers, and in no way 
can the evil be completely averted except by the use 
of chemicals, which will neutralize the different corro- 
sive impurities of water. 

In tubular boilers, the hand-hole should be opened 
frequently and all sediment removed from over the 
fire ; keep the sheets, flues, tubes, gauge-cocks, glass 
gauges and connections well swept and perfectly clean, 
and the boiler and engine-room in neat condition. 
Keep a sharp lookout for leaks, and repair them if 
possible without delay, and allow no water to come in 
contact with the exterior of the boiler under any cir- 
cumstances. Examine and repair every blister as soon 
as it appears, and make frequent and thorough exami- 
nations of the boiler with a small steel hammer. 

In case of foaming, close the throttle, and keep 



204 

closed long enough to show true level of water. If 
the water level is right, feeding and blowing will gen- 
erally stop the trouble. With muddy water it is a 
safe rule to blow out 6 or 8 inches every day. If foam- 
ing is violent from dirty water, or change from salt to 
fresh, or from fresh to salt, in addition to following the 
above directions, check draught and cover the fire with 
ashes or fresh fuel. 

Great watchfulness is necessary when steam is 
raised, the safety-valve fixed, the fire strong and the 
engine at rest. In every case there is a rapid and dan- 
gerous absorption of heat, the temperature, latent and 
sensible heat included, often rising to 1200° Fahr. 
Frequently it is but the work of an instant to convert 
the latent into sensible heat, thus generating an irresist- 
ible force which bursts the boiler and destroys life and 
property. The destruction generally coming at the 
moment of starting the engine, the opening of the 
valve inducing a commotion in the water, which flashes 
into steam the instant it touches the heated plates. 
Steam has been known to rise from a pressure of 32 
lbs. to the square inch to 90 lbs. to the square inch, 
in the short space of seven minutes, with the engine at 
rest. It ought to quicken the vigilance of every en- 
gineer to know that the explosive energy in each and 
every cubic foot of water in his boiler at 60 lbs. pres- 
sure, is equal to that contained in i lb. of gunpowder. 

From avaricious motives it has become quite com- 
mon to discharge, or to decline to employ, qualified 
and careful engineers. Incompetent men are employed 
because their labor costs a few dollars less than that 
of the former. This is too much of a bad thing to 
pass over without notice. Employ good skilful men 
in the management of steam power, or employ none at 
all, and pay them decent wages. If an oversight takes 
place, and the best and most careful men are liable to 



205 

• 

make mistakes, never scold, reprimand or exact ser- 
vice during dangerous emergencies, as in the event of 
lost water in the boiler. In no case risk life, limb or 
property, and do not let the consideration of saving a 
few dollars debar you from securing intelligent assist- 
ants. The Turkish mode of driving business on a late 
occasion was to discharge the English engineers who 
brought out the war vessels which were built in Eng- 
land, and supply the vacancies by installing cheap, 
green hands. After getting up steam the new " Chief' 
proceeded to start the engines. A lift at a crank pro- 
duced no results, a pull at a lever was equally useless. 
At length the illustrious official espied a bright brass 
cock, and thinking he had got hold of a sure thing 
this time, proceeded to give it a twist, when he was 
suddenly saluted with a jet of steam full in the face, 
which swept the " engineer" and his assistants out of 
the engine-room, into the fire-room down-stairs. So 
much for cheap labor and the consequent results. 

PREVENTION OF BOILER SCALE. 

The scale in boilers is formed from impurities of 
the water, and if pure water only is fed into the boiler, 
no scale is formed. This being settled beyond doubt, 
many methods have been proposed to purify the feed 
water in a rapid and cheap manner. To prevent scale 
by the use of calcium hydrate and soda, F. Scheukel 
employs one or more tanks, according to the supply 
needed for the works, in which the water from the 
river is purified, and another tank for the purified feed- 
water. As purifying tanks he uses four iron boxes (or 
cylinders of old steam boilers), not over 5 feet high, 
which have an outlet cock about 6 inches above the 
bottom. They are heated by steam to 60° at least, and 
are preferable surrounded by some non-conducting 
material. Besides, they are furnished with a stirring 
arrangement, preferable a Koerting steam-jet stirrer. 



206 

The pure water tank is placed on a level below the 
purifying tank, so that the purified water can flow di- 
rectly into it from the purifying tanks, without the use 
of a pump. The water in the purifying tanks is heated 
as much as possible and the required quantity of thin 
milk of lime added and stirred ; this quantity being 
either calculated after the analysis of water or ascer- 
tained by experiment. Only so much lime is to be 
added that red litmus paper dipped into the water, 
after 15 to 20 seconds begins to turn blue. Then the 
calculated quantity of pure (96 to 98 per cent.) soda 
dissolved in hot water is added, stirred, and the water 
allowed to settle. In 20 to 30 minutes the precipitate 
formed is thrown down in large flakes and the per- 
fectly clear water is drawn off" into the feed^water tank. 
With ammonium oxalate it must not give any turbidity; 
and if another sample taken becomes turbid on the ad- 
dition of calcium chloride, too much soda has been 
used. The advantages of this method of purifying the 
feed-water are : That the boiler requires no cleaning 
for a whole season ; that the iron of the boiler-walls is 
not attacked ; that the water does not froth and stop 
up the gauge-cocks, etc ; that the steam is free from 
acid ; that steam is easier generated and thereby fuel 
is saved ; that no breaking out of scale is required, its 
cost saved and the interruption of work caused there- 
by is avoided; that, finally, the method is comparatively 
inexpensive. 

The purification of water by milk of lime and soda 
is known, but as regards the practical application, the 
above communication is valuable. The'Tharm Central- 
halle," however, remarks that soda is not the cheapest 
purifier for all calcareous water, but for such as con- 
tain considerable proportions of calcium nitrate; 
besides gypsum, barium chloride would be cheaper to 
employ. 



207 

ON THE FORM, STRENGTH, ETC., OF STEAM 

BOILERS. 

Regarding the y^r^w of boilers it is now an ascer- 
tained fact that the maximum strength is obtained by 
adopting the cylindrical or circular form, the haycock, 
hemispherical, and wagon-shaped boilers, so general 
at one time, have now deservedly gone almost out of 
use. Good boiler plate is capable of withstanding a 
tensile strain of 50,000 lbs., or 60,000 lbs., on every 
square inch of section; but it will only bear a third of this 
strain without permanent derangement of structure, 
and 40,000 lbs., or 30,000 lbs., even, upon the square 
inch, is a preferable proportion. It has been found 
that the tenacity of boiler-plate increases with the 
temperature up to 570°, at which point the tenacity 
commences to diminish. At 32° cohesive force of a 
square inch of section was 56,000 lbs.; at 570° it was 
66,500 lbs.; at 720°, 55,000 lbs.; at 1050°, 32,000 lbs.; 
at 1240°, 22,000 lbs.; and at 1317°, 9,000 lbs. Strips of 
iron, when cut in the direction of the fibre, were found 
by experiment to be 6 per cent, stronger than when 
cut across the grain. The strength of riveted joints 
has also been demonstrated by tearing them directly 
asunder. In two different kinds of joints, double and 
single riveted, the strength was found to be, in the 
ratio of the plate, as the numbers 100, 70 and 56. 
Assuming the strength of the plate to be - - 100 
The strength of a double riveted joint would 
be, after allowing for the adhesion of the surfaces 

of the plate 70 

And the strength of a single riveted joint - - 56 
These figures, representing the relative strengths 
of plates and joints in vessels required to be steam and 
water tight, may be safely relied on as perfectly cor- 
rect. The accidental overheating of a boiler has been 
found to reduce the ultimate or maximum strength of 



208 

the plates from 65,000 to 45,000 lbs. per square inch 
of section. Every description of boiler used in manu- 
factories or on board of steamers should be constructed 
to a bursting pressure of 400 to 500 lbs. on the square 
inch ; and locomotive boilers, which are subject to much 
harder duty, to a bursting pressure of 600 to 700 lbs. Such 
boilers are usually worked at 90 to 1 10 lbs., on the inch, 
but are frequently worked up to a pressure of 120, and, 
when rising steep grades sometimes even as high as 
200 lbs., to the square inch. In a boiler subject to such 
an enormous working pressure, it requires the utmost 
care and attention on the part of the engineer to satisfy 
himself that the flat surfaces of the fire box are ca- 
pable of resisting that pressure, and that every part of 
the boiler is so nearly balanced in its powers of re- 
sistance as that, when one part is at the point of 
rupture, every other part is at the point of yielding to 
the same uniform force : for we find that, taking a lo- 
comotive boiler of the usual size, even with a pressure 
of 100 lbs., on the square inch, it retains an expanding 
force within its interior of nearly 60,000 tons, which is 
rather increased than diminished at a high speed. To 
show the strain upon a high-pressure boiler, 30 feet 
long, 6 feet diameter, having two centre flues, each 2 
feet 3 inches diameter, working at a pressure of 50 lbs., 
on the square inch, we have only to multiply the num- 
ber of the square feet of surface, 1030, exposed to pres- 
sure, by 321, and we have the force of 3319 tons, which 
such a boiler has to sustain. To go farther, and esti- 
mate the pressure at 450 lbs., on the square inch, which 
a well-constructed boiler of this size will bear before it 
bursts, and we have the enormous force of 29,871, or 
nearly 30,000 tons, bottled up within a cylinder 30 
feet long and 6 feet diameter. Boilers in actual use 
should be tested at least once a year, b}- forcing water 
into them bj- the hand-feed pump, until the safety-valve 



209 

is lifted, which should be loaded with at least twice the 
working pressure for the occasion. If a boiler will 
not stand this pressure it is not safe, and either its 
strength should be increased or the working pressure 
should be diminished. Internal flues, such as contain 
the furnace in the interior of the boiler, should be kept 
as near as possible to the cylindrical form ; and, as 
wrought iron will yield to a force tending to crush it 
about one-half of what would tear it asunder, the flues 
should in no case exceed one-half the diameter of the 
boiler, with the same thickness of plates they may be 
considered equally safe with the other parts. The force 
of compression being so different from that of tension, 
greater safety would be ensured if the diameter of the 
internal flues were in the ratio i to 2>^ instead of i to 
3 of the diameter of the boiler. As regards the relative 
size and strength of flues, it may be stated that a cir- 
cular flue 1 8 inches in diameter will resist double the 
pressure of one 3 feet in diameter. Mill owners, with 
plenty of room and a limited experience with steam 
power, would do well to dispense with boilers contain- 
ing many flues, the expense is greater and the dura- 
bility less than where there is one or two only. The 
foam caused by a large number of flues is apt to deceive 
an inexperienced engineer, causing him to believe that 
there is plenty of water in the boiler when he tries the 
gauge cock, when there is but very little, often causing 
an explosion. Some mill-owners insert a fusible plug 
in the crown of the furnace to indicate danger from low 
water. As common lead melts at 620°, a rivet of this 
metal i inch in diameter, inserted immediately over 
the fire place, will give due notice, so that relief may 
be obtained before the internal pressure of the steam 
exceeds that of the resisting power of the heated plates. 
In France, an extensive use is made of fusible metal 
plates, generally covered by a perforated metallic disc. 



210 

which protects the alloy of Which the plate is composed, 
and allows it to ooze through as soon as the steam has 
attained the temperature necessary to insure the fusion 
of the plate, which varies from 280° to 350°. The 
reader will find a number of such alloys under the 
tabular view of alloys and their melting heats, further 
on. Another method is the bursting plate, fixed in a 
frame and attached to some convenient part of the up- 
per side of the boiler, of such thickness and ductility 
as to cause rupture when the pressure exceeds that on 
the safety valve. But, beyond all question, constant 
use should be made on all boilers of a good and reliable 
system of steam gauges, glass tubes, gauge cocks, 
safety valves, etc. By means of the glass tubes affixed 
to the fronts of the boilers, the height of the water 
within the boiler is indicated at once, for the water will 
stand at the same height in the tube that it stands in 
the boiler, communication being established with the 
water below and the steam above, by means of stop 
cocks. 

When dry steam is an object, the use of the steam 
dome on boilers is strongly recommended ; opinions 
are divided as to the real value of mud drums, some 
reason strongly in their favor while others discard 
them entirely ; but there can be no question as to the 
true economy of heating the feed water previous to 
emission into the boiler; it should always be done 
when practicable to do so, by means of some one of 
the many contrivances for that purpose which are now 
in the market. Regarding the power of boilers, it may 
be stated that a boiler 30 feet long and 3 feet in diam- 
eter, will afford 30x3x3.14x2 — 141.30 square feet of 
surface, or steam for 14 hors^-power, if 10 feet are 
assumed for one horse-power. Two short boilers are 
preferable to one long one, on account of having more 
fire surface, — it being always necessary to have as 
much fire surface as possible to make the best use of 



211 

the fuel — as the hotter the surface is kept, the less 
fuel it takes to do the same amount of work. When 
there is a large furnace it gives the fireman a better 
chance to keep the steam regular, for when clearing 
out one part of the furnace, he can keep a hot fire in 
the other. For each horse-power of the engine there 
ought to be at least one square foot of grate, and three 
feet would be better. In setting a boiler, arrangement 
should be made to carry on combustion with the 
greatest possible heat. This requires good non-con- 
ductors of heat, such as brick, with which to surround 
the fire. If these bricks are of a white color, the com- 
bustion is more perfect than if of a dark color. The 
roof, as well as the sides of the furnace, should be of 
white fire-brick. The bars of the furnace should be 
1 8 or 20 inches below the boiler or crown of the fur- 
nace. They should slope downward toward the back 
part, about half an inch to the foot. A crack in a 
boiler plate may be closed by boring holes in the 
direction of the crack and inserting rivets with large 
heads, so as to cover up the imperfection. If the top 
of the furnace be bent down, from the boiler having 
been accidentally allowed to get short of water, it may 
be set up again by a screw-jack, a fire of wood having 
been previously made beneath the injured plate ; but 
it will in general be nearly as expeditious a course to 
remove the plate and introduce a new one, and the re- 
sult will be more satisfactory. There is one object 
that requires very particular attention, and which must 
be of a certain size to produce the best effect, and that 
is the flue leading from the boiler to the chimney, as 
well as the size and elevation of the chimney itself. 
Every chimney should be built several/ feet above the 
mill house, so that there is no obstructibn to break the 
air from the top of the chimney. In England a factory 
chimney suitable for a 20 horse-power boiler is com- 
monly made about 20 inches square inside, and 80 1^^ 



212 

high and these dimensions are correct for consumption 
of 15 lbs. coal per horse-power per hour, a common 
consumption for factory engines. In the dominion of 
Canada and the United States, chimneys of sheet iron, 
from 30 to 50 feet high, are in quite common use by 
owners of saw, and other mills, and they seem to 
answer every requirement. 

DON'T DO THESE THINGS. 

Don't open a cock or a valve under pressure, and 
let steam into cold pipes suddenly. If you do there 
will be a bill of repairs to pay, to say nothing of the 
liability of killing or maiming someone for life. A 
man was employed in a brewery cleaning barrels with 
steam from the boiler. He opened the globe valve 
suddenly and blew up the barrel, losing one arm by 
his imprudence. 

Don't suppose that a safety valve is going to think 
for itself, and don't fancy it is all right because it was 
tried last month, or last year, perhaps. Try the safety 
valve daily, and examine it, so as to be sure that the 
stem is not bent, or that the weight has not been 
shifted by accident or design. 

Don't omit to keep the water gauge in good order, 
and be sure that the openings into the boiler, both 
steam and water, are not stopped up partially by scale 
or something lodged in them. Where the openings 
are of different sizes the water level will not show 
properly. Test the gauge by the gauge cocks, and be 
sure that it is right. 

Don't suppose that the boiler is all right internally 
because it has never blown up yet. Get into it, and 
see whether it is or not. The man-hole plate ought to 
come off every week, and the engineer should satisfy 
himself by inspection that the braces are all right. 



213 

Don't forget that the blow cock is a thief which is 
very apt to run away with a great deal of coal unless 
it is tight. It should not leak a drop. 

Don*t be too liberal with oil or fat in the cylinder. 
Some men are constantly slushing the cylinder with 
grease, unider the impression that it makes the engine 
run easier. After one or two revolutions all the grease 
that does not cover the rolls of the cylinder is carried 
out with the exhaust and scattered over the surround- 
ing country. On a wooden roof this invites fire, and 
on a metal roof it soon causes leak by corrosion, for 
fatty acids are the most active of corrosiye agents. 
Use sight feed cups in preference to any other agents; 
they not only save attendance, but they feed oil as it 
is needed — drop by drop. 

Do not start up an engine in the morning under 
full head, or you will have a cylinder head or some 
joints blown out. 



WCICHT OF wnoucHT moN. 



Thkk- 


Sq.FL 


F£ 


Rd. B.r 


Thjck- 


Sq. Ft. 




WeiKkt 

BTS,, 


inchcii. 




Poonds 


pQUPds 


IllcbM, 


Pound. 


PODDds 


Poandi. 


A 


1.263 


.0033 


.0026 


il 


37.89 


2.960 


2.325 


s 


2.o:!6 


.1)132 


.0104 


1 


40.42 


3.368 


2.645 




3.789 


.029S 


.0233 


A 


42.&4 


3.803 


2.986 




3.052 


.0526 


.0414 


i 


45.47 


4.263 


3.S48 


A 


6.315 


.0823 


.0646 


A 


48.00 


4.750 


3.730 


E* 


7.578 


.1184 


.0930 


1 


60.52 


5.L63 


4.13S 




8.841 


.1612 


.1266 




53.05 


5.802 


4.667 




10.10 


.2105 


.1653 




55.57 


6.368 


5.001 




11.37 


.2665 


.2093 


1 


68.10 


6.960 


5.466 




12.63 


.3290 


.2583 


60.63 


7.578 


6.652 




13.89 


.3980 


.3126 


i 


65.68 


8.893 


6.985 




15.16 


.4736 


.3720 


r 


70.73 


10.31 


8.101 




Ki.42 


.5.558 


.4365 


76.78 


11.84 


9.300 


tf 


17.68 


.'H46 


.5063 


2 


80.83 


13.47 


10.58 


i 


18.95 


.7400 


.5813 




85.89 


15 21 


11.95 


/ 


20,21 


.8420 


.6613 




90.04 


17.06 


13.39 


22.73 


1.066 


.8370 




9.i.09 


19.00 


14.92 




26.26 


1.316 


1.033 




101.0 


21.06 


16.63 


i 


27.79 


1.592 


1.250 




106.1 


23.21 


18.23 




30.31 


1.895 


1.488 


I 


111.2 


25.47 


20.01 


i 


32.84 


2.223 


1.746 




116.2 


27.84 


21.87 




30..17 


2.579 


2.025 


3 


121.3 


30.31 


23.81 



Flat bars may be estimated by dividing the size by 
a square number ; as, one-quarter inch by one inch. 
One-fourth that of one inch square. 

To Test Qualitvof Iron. — If fracture gives long 
.silky fibres of leaden-grey hue, fibres cohering and 
twisting together before breaking, may be considered 
a tough, soft iron. A medium, even grain mixed with 
fibres a good sign. A short, blackish fibre indicates 
badly refined iron. A very fine grain denotes a hard, 
steely iron, apt to be cold-short, hard to work with the 
file. Coarse grain with brilliant crystallized fracture, 
yellow or brown spots, denotes a (^///ir iron, cold-short, 
■^'Orking easily when heated ; welds easily. Cracks 

tht edge of bars, sign of hot, short iron. Good 



215 

iron is readily heated soft, under the hammer, and 
throws out but few sparks. 

All iron contains more or less carbon — the hardest 
the most. 

Note on Forcings. — Iron, while heating, if ex- 
posed to air, will oxidize ; while at white heat, if in 
contact with coal, will carbonize, or become steely. 
Iron should be heated as rapidly as possible. 

Simple Method of Testing the Quality of 
Steel. — Good steel, in its soft state, has a curved 
fracture and uniform gray luster ; in its hard state, a 
dull, silvery, uniform white. Cracks, threads, or spark- 
ling particles denote bad quality. 

Good steel will not bear a white heat without fall- 
ing to pieces, and will crumble under the hammer at 
a bright, red heat, while at a middling heat it may be 
drawn out under the hammer to a fine point. Care 
should be taken that before attempting to draw it out 
to a point, the fracture is not concave, and should it 
be so, the end should be filed to an obtuse point before 
operating. Steel should be drawn out to a fine point 
and plunged into cold water; the fractured point should 
scratch glass. 

To test its toughness, place a fragment on a block 
of cast-iron ; if good, it may be driven by the blow of 
a hammer into the cast-iron ; if poor, it will crush 
under the blow. 

Nitric acid will produce a black spot on steel ; the 
darker the spot the harder the steel. Iron, on the 
contrary, remains bright if touched with nitric acid. 



216 



TEMPERING STEEL. 



Color. 



Light 

straw 
Dark 

straw 
Brown 

yellow 
Dark 
purple 



Purpose. 



Turning tools 

for metal. 
Wood tools, 
taps & dies. 
Hatchets, 
Chip'g chis. 

I Springs, 



etc. 



} 
} 



Tem. 



Fah. 
430° 

470° 

500° 

550° 



Alloy whose fusing^ 
point is same 
temperature. 



Tin Lead. 
I to iji 

I to 2}4 

I to 4^ 

I to 12 



Horse-power of Boilers. — With good natural 
draft, flue boilers should have about 10 square feet of 
heating surface for the evaporation of i cubic foot of 
water per hour ; and this evaporation per hour may be 
taken to represent i horse-power. 

The coal required to effect this evaporation will 
generally be about 8 pounds, and the grate surface 
provided for the combustion of this amount of coal per 
hour should be about half a square foot. Therefore, 
for each horse-power that a flue boiler is expected to 
develop economically, the following will be required : 
10 square feet of heating surface. 
J4 square foot of grate surface. 
I cubic foot of water per hour. 
8 lbs. of good coal per hour. 

Tubular boilers should have 13 square feet of heat- 
ing surface for each horse-power. 

Boilers may be made to do more than double this 
amount of work by the use of a forced draft, but at a 
great waste of fuel, and increased danger, which should 
be avoided as far as possible. 

The strength of cylinder boilers is directly as their 
thickness, and inversely as their diameter. That is, 
if one of two boilers which have the same diameter is 
twice as thick as the other, it is twice as strong. And 



217 

if one of two boilers, made of the same thickness, is 
twice the diameter of the other, it is only half as strong. 
1'able Giving Horsb-Powbr op Boilers the Foi.i,ow- 

ing sizes. 



Uh meter 


Length 




Length 


DiflDKte 


Heating 


Pal"' 






Number 






Surface. 




IdrJics. 




Tubes, 






Square ft 


Pressure, 


■M 


18 


^70 


18 


4 


1602 


100 


s 


16 


BO 


16 


8j 


1472 


i»8 


71 


16 


112 


la 


3 


1496 


99 


71 


16 


112 


15 


3 


1400 


93 


BO 


18 


05 


18 


3 


1200 


80 


00 


17 


OS 


17 


3 


1148 


76 


60 


18 


65 


16 


3 


1076 


72 


60 


16 


SO 


11) 


3 


1088 


72 


60 


15 


80 


15 


3 


1020 


68 


60 


14 


80 


14 


3 


962 


63 


60 


13 


80 


13 


3 


884 


59 


64 


18 


SO 


18 


H 


951 


63 


54 


17 


60 


17 


^ 


900 


60 


64 


IS 


50 


16 


U 


736 


53 


64 


IB 


60 


16 


3 


832 


55 


54 


16 


60 


IS 




780 


52 


64 


U 


60 


14 


3 


728 


48 


64 


a 


60 


13 


3 


676 


45 


54 


V. 


00 


12 


3 


624 


41 


48 


16 


40 


16 


3} 


683 


46 


48 


16 


49 


16 


3 


684 


46 


4S 


16 


49 


16 


3 


642 


43 


48 


14 


49 


14 


3 


600 


40 


48 


13 


49 


13 


3 


565 


37 


48 


12 


49 


12 


3 


513 


34 


48 




65 


11 


il 


542 


36 


48 


10 


65 


10 


495 




4i 


15 


^38- 


15 


3 


608 


34 


42 


14 


i 


14 


3 


476 


32 


42 


13 


S 


13 


3 


441 


30 


42 


12 


5 


12 


3 


408 


27 


42 


11 


S 


11 


2 


390 


20 


42 


10 


46> 


10 


2 


365 


24 


42 


!) 


45 , 


9 


2 


320 


22 


42 




45 \ 
45 ^ 


8 


2 


285 


19 


42 


"• 


7 


2 


24i 


16 



218 



COMPARATIVE VALUE OP DIPPERENT KINDS OP 

WOOD FOR FUEL. 

The following table shows the weight of one cord 
of various kinds of wood, dry, and their relative values 
for fuel, red oak being taken as the standard : 



KIND OF WOOD. 



Red Oak, 

Shell-bark Hickory, . 
Chestnut White Oak, 

White Oak, 

White Ash, 

White Beech, 

Black Walnut, 

Black Birch, 

Yellow Oak, 

Hard Maple, 

White Elm, 

Large Magnolia, 

Soft Maple, 

Soft Yellow Pine, . . . . 

Sycamore, 

Chestnut 

White Birch, 

Jersey Pine, 

Pitch Pine 

White Pine, 



wciKni oi one 
Cord in 
pounds. 


Relative mlue 
for Fuel. 


3,254 


1.00 


4,469 


1.45 


3,965 


1.25 


3,821 


1.17 


8,450 


1.12 


3,236 


.9^ 


3,044 


.91 


3,116 


.a 


2,919 


37 


2,878 


87 


2,692 


.84 


2,704 


.81 


2,668 


.78 


2,463 


.78 


2,391 


.75 


2,333 


.75 


2,369 


.70 


2,137 


.70 


1,904 


.62 


1,868 


.61 



Notes on Packing. — In packing :ods use only 
the best packing, consisting of rubber elastic packing, 
soapstone, asbestos. Hemp or lamp-wi/k well tallowed 
makes a good packing. Many practice the plan of cut- 
ting up strips of old rubber belting &r packing. Such 
stuff will ruin machinery. The xabber consists of 
substitutes that stand no heat and crumble or parch, 
heating and cutting the rod. Renove all old packing 
from stuflSng boxes and do not se'up new packing too 
tight. 

Joints should be packed eitler with wire gauge, 
packing gum, sheet copper or i lead joint. The latter 



219 

is necessary in connecting boilers and engine together 
where a close, flat fit cannot always be had. In such 
cases it is best to cut a ring from a piece of rubber belt- 
ing exact size of pipe inside, about one-half wide; 
place this ring in the centre of joint, measuring equally 
from edge of flange, then tighten suflSciently to be cer- 
tain that it forms an air-tight joint ; then plaster out- 
side of flanges with stiff clay, or tie a strap tightly 
around, leaving a hole for pouring metal ; then plaster 
the outside and a neat joint will be run. Pour lead 
and tighten bolts as steam rises and you have a joint 
that can be relied upon. Steam drums that are bolted 
instead of riveted must have such joints. 

Joints that must be broken often should be of sheet 
copper, which can be broken as often as desired and 
will maintain a good joint. 

Man-heads to boilers often give much trouble, ow- 
ing to irregularities. By using a lead ring, a good joint 
is had and may be broken as often as desired, but should 
be well tallowed. Hemp plaited, well white-leaded, 
will answer for a short while, but must be replaced 
when broken if very old. 

Fii^ES AND Their Use. — To choose a flat file, turn 
its edge upward and look along it, selecting one which 
has an even sweep from end to end, and having no flat 
places or hollows. To choose a half-round file, turn 
the edge upward, look along it and select that which 
has an even sweep and no flat or hollow places on the 
half-round side, even though it be hollow in the length 
of the flat side. 

In draw-filing, take short, quick strokes, which 
will prevent the file from pinning and scratching. lyong 
strokes, no matter how long the work may be, are 
useless save to make scratches. Remember it is less 
the number of strokes given the file than the weight 
placed upon it that is effective ; therefore, when using 
a rough file, stand suflSciently away from the work to 



220 

bring the weight of the body upon the forward stroke. 
New files should be used at first upon broad surfaces, 
since narrow edges are apt to break the teeth if they 
have the fibrous edges oinwom. 

For brass work use the file on a broad surface until 
its teeth are dulled, then make two or three strokes of 
the file under a heavy pressure upon the edge of a 
piece of sheet iron, which will break off the dulled 
edges of the teeth, and leave a new fibrous edge for 
brass work. 

Use bastard-cut files to take off a quantity of metal 
of ordinary hardness ; second-cut in fitting, and also 
to file unusually hard metal ; smoothing to finish in 
final adjustment or preparatory to applying emery 
cloth ; dead smooth, to finish very fine work ; float file 
on lathe work. 

To prevent files from pinning, and hence from 
scratching, properly clean them, and then chalk them 
well. 

To Test Hard and Soft Water. — Dissolve a little 
good soap in alcohol and let a few drops fall into a 
glass of water. If the water is hard it will turn milky; 
if soft, it will not. 

Ingenious Way of Cooi^ing a Journai.. — Quite 
an ingenious way of cooling a journal that cannot be 
stopped is to hang a short endless belt on the shaft 
next to the box and let the lower part of it run in cold 
water. The turning of the shaft carries the belt slowly 
around, bringing fresh cold water continually in con- 
tact with the heated shaft, and without spilling or 
spattering a drop of water. 

Cement for Iron that wili. resist Hammer 
Blows. — ^The following mixture has been used with 
the greatest possible success for the cementing of iron 
railing tops, iron gratings to stoves, etc., in fact, with 
such effect as to resist the blows of a sledge hammer. 



221 

This mixture is composed of equal parts of sulphur 
and whitelead, with about one-sixth proportion of 
borax, the three being thoroughly incorporated to- 
gether, so as to form one homogeneous mass. When 
the application is to be made of this composition, it is 
wet with strong sulphuric acid, and a thin layer of it 
is placed between the two pieces of iron, these being 
at once pressed together. In five days it will be per- 
fectly dry, all traces of the cement having vanished, 
and the work having every appearance of welding. 

To Make a Cheap Telephone.— To make a ser- 
viceable telephone from one house to another only re- 
quires enough wire and two cigar boxes. First, select 
your boxes, and make a hole half an inch in diameter 
in the centre of the bottom of each, and then place one 
in each of the houses )rou wish to connect ; then get 
five pounds of common iron stove-pipe wire, make a 
loop in one end and put it through the hole in your 
cigar box and fasten it with a nail ; then draw it tight 
to the other box, supporting it when necessary with a 
stout cord. 

You can easily run your line into the house by bor- 
ing a hole through the glass. Support your boxes with 
slats nailed across the window and your. telephone is 
complete. The writer has one that is two hundred 
yards long, and cost forty-five cents, that will carry 
music when the organ is plajdng thirty feet away in 
another room. 



Showing the number of days from a given day 

in any month to the same day in 

any other month. 



1 .^ 


1 


6 

g 

J 


■g 








^ 




, 


i 


J 
£ 


1 




366 


31 


SB 


90 


120 


161 


181 


212 


243 


273 


30J 


334 






334 


365 


28 


59 
31 


as 


120 


150 


I8t 


212 


242 


273 


303 






306 


337 


365 


lo 


92,122 


153 


184 


214 


246 


275 






276 


30H 


,(34 


306 


61 


91 


i'22 

T2 


153 


183 


214 


244 






246 
214 


276 


304 
273 


335 
304 


365 


31 


fil 


123 


153 


185 


214 






334 


365 


30 


61 


B2 


122 


153 










184 


215 


243 


274 


304 






31 


62 


92 


123 


153 








153 


1^4 


212 


243 


273 


304I334 


165 


31 


61 


92 








Rept8iuber_ 


m 


153 


181 


212 


242 


273303 


334 


365 


30 


61 


91 




92 


123 
~B2 


161 

120 


182 
151 


312 

m 


243 273 
Jl«!242 


304 


335 


365 


31 










273 


304 


334 


365 








December 


31 


63 


90 


121 


151 


82 212 


243 


274 


304 


335 


J65 



EXAMPLE. 

To find the number of days from June i6tli to Oc- 
tober i6th:— 

In the left-hand column find June, Run your eye 
along to the right until it reaches the column headed 
October at the top. At the intersection of the two col- 
umns you will find the answer, 122 days. 

Short Methodof Calculating Interest. — Rule 
— Multiply the principal by the number of days and 
divide by 6. Point off three figures, and you have the 



223 

interest at 6 per cent, in dollars, cents and mills. Then 
to obtain the interest at any other per cent., divide the 
result obtained at 6 per cent, by 6, which will give the 
interest at i per cent. Multiply the interest at i per 
cent, by the rate desired, and you have the answer. 

KXAMPLB. 
Find the interest of |2i6 for 124 days, at 5 per cent. 

|2l6 

124 



864 

432 
216 

6) 26784 , 

6) $4,464 Interest on $216 for 124 days at 6 per cent. 

.744 Interest on $216 for 124 days at i per cent 



I3.720 Interest on $216 for 124 days at 5 per cent. 

When fractions occur in dividing it is usual to ig- 
nore them, as the result in such cases, while not abso- 
lutely accurate to the fraction of a mill, is near enough 
for all practical purposes. 

The person who masters this simple rule thoroughly 
has no occasion to resort to interest tables for the cal- 
culation of interest. 

PRACTICAL RECEIPTS FOR MACHINISTS AND 

MILLMEN. 

Anti-friction Metal. — Copper, 4 lbs.; regulus of 
antimony, 8 lbs., Banca tin, 96 lbs. 2 Grain zinc, ^% 
lbs.; purified zinc, 7^ lbs.; antimony, i lb. 3. Zinc, 
17 parts; copper, i part; antimony, lyi parts. This 
possesses unsurpassable anti-friction qualities, and does 
not require the protection of outer castings of a harder 
metal. 4. Block tin, 8 lbs.; antimony, 2 lbs.; copper. 



224 

I lb. If the metal be too hard, it may be softened by 
adding some lead. 5. The best alloy for journal boxes 
is composed of copper, 24 lbs.; tin, 24 lbs., and anti- 
mony, 8 lbs. Melt the copper first, then add the tin, 
and lastly the antimony. It should be first run into 
ingots, then melted, and cast in the form required for 
the boxes. 6. Melt in a crucible i j^ lbs. of copper, 
and, while the copper is melting, melt in a ladle 25 
lbs. of tin and 3 of antimony, nearly red hot, pour the 
two together, and stir until nearly cool. This makes 
the finest kind of lining metal. 7. Very cheap, Lead 
100 lbs.; antimony, 15 lbs. This costs about 10 cents 
per lb. 8. For Bearings to stcstain great weights. — 
Copper, I lb.; zinc, J4 oz.; tin, 2j^ oz. 9. Hard bear- 
ings for machinery. — Copper, i lb.; tin, 2 ozs. 10. 
Very Hard ditto. — Copper, i lb.; tin, 2% ozs. 11. Lin- 
ing Metal for boxes of Railway Cars. — Mix tin, 24 lbs.; 
copper 4 lbs.; antimony, 8 lbs.; (for a hardening) then 
add tin 72 lbs. 12. Li7iing Metal of Locomotives^ Axle 
trees. — Copper, 86.03.; tin, 13.97. 13. Another, French. 
— Copper, 82 parts ; tin, 10 parts ; zinc, 8 parts. 14. 
Another, [Stephenson' s^. — Copper, 79 parts; tin, 8 parts; 
zinc, 5 parts ; lead, 8 parts. 15. Another {Belgian). — 
Copper, 89.02, parts; tin, 2.44 parts; zinc, 7.76 parts; 
iron, 0.78. 16. Another {English). — Copper, 73.96 parts; 
tin, 9.49 parts ; zinc, 9.03 parts ; lead, 7.09 parts ; iron, 
0.43 parts. 17. Another. — Copper, 90.06 parts; tin, 3.56 
parts; zinc, 6.38. oi Nickel Anti-friction Metcil. — A late 
improvement in the manufacture of anti-friction metal 
is the introduction of a small percentage of nickel into 
either of the above, or any other anti-friction composi- 
tion. 

Brazing Cast-iron. — There are two ways of join- 
ing cast-iron. i. Fit the broken pieces exactly together 
in moulding sand and pour melted iron over the parts 
to be joined. When cold, chip oflf the superfluous metal 
and you will have a joint scarcely to be detected. 2. 



225 

Well tin the parts to be joined, fit together in sand as 
above, and pour melted brass over them. 

To Bend Glass Tubes. — Hold the tube in the up- 
per part of the flame of a spirit-lamp, revolving it 
slowly between the fingers ; when red hot it may be 
easily bent into any desired shape. To soften large 
tubes a lamp with a double current of air should be 
used, as it gives a much stronger heat than the simple 
lamp. 

Tempering Points of Tools. — After being tem- 
pered the volume of the tool is slightly increased, and 
consequently its specific gravity is decreased. As the 
expansion, or increase, of volume is so very slight, it 
is quite immaterial which is plunged into the liquid 
first ; however, every moment the edge is kept out it 
is cooling, and the tempering may be rendered defec- 
tive thereby. Mercury tempers the hardest, then water, 
then salt water, then oil of various kinds — as whale oil. 
As oil cools the metal more slowly, it is not tempered 
so hard but the tenacity is increased. 

The United States Government Tempering 
Secret. — The following process and mixtures, patented 
by Garman and Siegfried, and owned by the Steel Re- 
fining and Tempering Co., of Boston, Mass., cost the 
U. S. Government $10,000 for the right of using in 
their shops, and is said to impart extraordinary hard- 
ness and durability to the poorest kinds of steel. Seig- 
fried*s specification reads as follows : '' I first heat the 
steel to a cherry red in a clean smith's fire, and then 
cover the steel with chloride of sodium (common salt), 
purifying the fire also by throwing in salt. I work the 
steel in this condition, and while subjected to this treat- 
ment, until it is brought into nearly its finished form. 
I then substitute for the salt a compound composed of 
the following ingredients, and in about the following 
proportions : One part by weight of each of the follo'w- 



226 

ing substances : chloride of sodium (salt), sulphate of 
copper, sal-ammoniac, and sal-soda, together with ^ 
part by weight of pure nitrate of potassa (salt-petre), 
said ingredients being pulverized and mixed ; I alter- 
nately heat the steel and treat it by covering with this 
mixture and hammering it until it is thoroughly re- 
fined and brought into its finished form. 1 then return 
it to the fire and heat it slowly to a cherry red, and 
then plunge it into a bath composed of the following 
ingredients, in substantially the following proportions 
for the required quantity : Of rain water, i gal.; alum, 
sal-soda, sulphate of copper, of each 1% ozs.; of nitrate 
of potassa (salt-petre), i oz., and of chloride of sotdium 
(salt), 6 ozs. These quantities and proportions are 
stated as being what I regard as practically the best, but 
it is manifest that they may be slightly changed with- 
out departing from the principles of my invention.*' 

Cement to Mend Leaky Boilers. — Powdered 
litharge, 2 parts ; very fine sand, 2 parts ; slaked quick 
lime, I part. Mix all together. To use, mix the proper 
quantity with boiled linseed oil and apply quick. It 
gets hard very soon. 

Strong Cement for St^am Joints. — Whitelead 
ground in oil, 10 parts ; black oxide of manganese, 3 
parts; litharge, i part. Reduce to the proper consist- 
ency with boiled linseed oil and apply. 

Cement for Holes or Cracks. — Redlead ground 
in oil, 6 parts ; whitelead, 3 parts ; oxide of manganese, 
2 parts ; silicate of soda, i part ; litharge, J^ part, all 
mixed and used as putty. 

Rust Joint, Quick Setting. — Sal ammoniac pul- 
verized, I lb.; flour of sulphur, 2 lbs.; iron borings, 80 
lbs. ; mix to a paste with water in quantities as required 
for immediate use. 

Quick Setting Joins Better Than the Last, 
BUT Requires More Time to Set. — Sal ammonia, 2 
lbs.; sulphur, i lb.; iron filings, 206 lbs. 



227 

Air ANt) Water-tight Cement for Casks and 
Cisterns. — Melted glue, 8 parts ; linseed oil, 4 parts ; 
boiled into a varnish with litharge ; hardens in 48 hours. 

Marine Gi^ue. — India rubber, i part; coal tar, 12 
parts ; heat gently, mix, and add 20 parts of powdered 
shellac, pour out to cool ; when used, heat to about 250°. 

Another Ditto. — Glue, 12 parts; water, sufificient 
to dissolve, add yellow resin, 3 parts, melt, then add 
turpentine, 4 parts ; mix thoroughly together. 

Cement for External Use. — Ashes, 2 parts; 
clay, 3 parts ; sand, i part; mi^ with a little oil, very 
durable. 

Cement to Resist Red Heat and Boiling Wa- 
ter. — To 4 or 5 parts of clay, thoroughly dried and 
pulverized, add 2 parts of fine iron filings free from 
oxide, I part of peroxyde of manganese, i part of com- 
mon salt, and j^ part of borax. Mingle thoroughly, 
render as fine as possible, then reduce to thick paste 
with the necessary quantity of water, mixing well, use 
immediately, and apply heat, gradually increasing 
almost to a white heat. 

Cement to Join Sections of Cast-Iron Wheels, 
ETC. — Make a paste of pure oxide of lead, litharge and 
concentrated glycerine. Unrivalled for fastening stone 
to stone or iron to iron. 

Varnish for Boilers. — Asphaltum dissolved in 
turpentine. 

Soft Cement for Steam-boilers, Steam-pipes, 
ETC. — Red or whitelead, in oil, 4 parts; iron borings 2 
to 3 parts. 

Hard Cement. — Iron borings in salt water and a 
small quantity of sal ammoniac with fresh water. 

Gasfitters' Cement. — Mix together resin, 4^ 
parts, wax, i part, and Venetian red, 3 parts. 

Plumbers' Cement. — Black resin, i part; brick 
dust, 2 parts ; well incorporated by a melting heat. 



228 

Coppersmiths' Cement. — Boiled linseed oil and 
redlead mixed together into a putty, are often used by 
coppersmiths and engineers to secure joints ; the wash- 
ers of leather or cloth are smeared with this mixture 
in a pasty state. 

Compositions to Fill Holes in Castings.— 
Mix I part, of borax in solution with 4 parts dry clay. 
Another, — Pulverized binoxide of manganese, mixed 
with a strong solution of silicate of soda (water clay) 
to form a thick paste. 

Cast-iron Cement. — Clean borings or turnings of 
cast-iron, 16 parts; sal ammoniac, 2 parts; flour of sul- 
phur, I part ; mix them well together in a mortar, and 
keep them dry. When required for use, take of the 
mixture, i part ; clean borings, 20 parts; mix thoroughly, 
and add a suflScient quantity of water. A little grind- 
stone dust added improves the cement. 

Cement for Steam-pipe Joints, etc.,with Faced 
Flanges. — Whitelead, mixed, 2 parts; redlead, dry, 
I part ; grind, or otherwise mix them to a consistence 
of thin putty ; apply interposed layers with i or 2 thick- 
nesses of canvas or gauze wire, as the necessity of the 
case may be. 

Cement for Joints of Iron Pipes or Holes in 
Castings. — Take of iron borings, coarsely powdered, 
5 lbs.; of powdered sal ammoniac, 2 oz.; of sulphur, i 
oz., and water suflScient to moisten it. This composi- 
tion hardens rapidly, but, if time can be allowed, it 
sets more firmly without the sulphur. Use as soon as 
mixed, and ram tightly into the joints or holes. 

Best Cement for Aquaria. — One part, by meas- 
ure, say a gill, of litharge ; i gill of plaster of Paris; i 
gill of drj', white sand ; \ a gill of finely powdered resin. 
Sift and keep corked tight until required for use, when 
it is to be made into a putt>' by mixing in boiled oil 
(linseed) with a little patent drier added. Never use it 
after it has been mixed (that is, with the oil) over fif- 



229 

teen hours. This cement can be used for marine as 
well as fresh water aquaria, as it resists the action of 
salt water. The tank can be used immediately, but it 
is best to give it three or four hours to dry. 

Another. — Mix equal quantities of any whitelead 
and redlead to a paste with mastic varnish and use as 
soon as mixed. 

Cement forBel,ting. — Wdferproof— Dissolve gutta 
percha in bisulphide of carbon to the consistence of 
molasses, slice down and thin the ends to be united, 
warm the parts and apply the cement, then hammer 
lightly on a smooth anvil, or submit the parts to heavy 
pressure. 

To Repair IvEakages in Fire Engine Hose. — 
Pass a round bar of iron into the hose under the leak, 
then rivet on a patch of leather, previously coated with 
marine glue. 

To Repair Rubber Hose. — Cut the hose apart 
where it is defective ; obtain from any gasfitter a piece 
of iron pipe 2 or 3 inches long, twist the hose over it 
until the ends meet, wrap with strong twine, well 
waxed, and it will last a long time. 

PoRTABi^E Glue for Draughtsmen. — Glue, 5 
ozs.; sugar, 2 ozs.; water, 8 ozs. ; melt in a water bath, 
cast it in molds. For use, dissolve in warm water. 

Cementing Emery to Wood. — Melt together 
equal parts of shellac, white resin and carbolic acid in 
crystals ; add the last after the others are melted. 

To Coat Iron with Emery. — Give the iron a 
good coat of oil and whitelead ; when this gets hdrd 
and dry, apply a mixture of glue and emery. 

To Clean Cotton Waste. — Pack the waste in a 
tin cylinder with a perforated false bottom and tube 
with stop-cock at bottom. Pour on the waste bisul- 
phide of carbon sufificient to cover, and allow to soak 
a few minutes ; then add more bisulphide, and so on 
for a time or two, and then squeeze out. By sli3a?^\& 



230 

distillation the whole of the bisulphide, or nearly all, 
can easily be recovered and so be used over again. 
This will free the cotton completely from grease. 

French Putty. — Seven pounds linseed oil and 4 
lbs. brown umber are boiled for two hours, and 62 
grammes wax stirred in. After removal from the fire 
S/4 lbs. fine chalk and 11 lbs. whitelead are added and 
thoroughly incorporated ; said to be very hard and per- 
manent. 

To Mknd Cracked Cast-Iron Vessels. — Drill a 
hole at each extreme end of the crack, to prevent its 
further extension, plug rivet the holes with copper, 
and, with fine iron filings saturated with urine, caulk 
the crack. Four parts of pulverized clay and one part 
of iron filings made into a paste with boiling linseed oil 
and applied hot is a good cement for the same purpose. 

To Prevent Iron Rusting. — Give it a coat of 
linseed oil and whiting, mixed together in the form of 
a paste. It is easily removed and will preserve iron 
from rusting for years. 

Glue for Labelling on Metals. — Boiling 
water, i qt. ; pulverized borax, 2 ozs. ; gum shellac, 4 
ozs. Boil till dissolved. Used for attaching labels to 
metals, or it will do to write inscriptions with, and 
dust or dab on a little bronze powder over it, varnish- 
ing over the bronze. 

Cement for Petroleum Lamps. — Boil 3 parts of 
resin with i part of caustic soda and 5 of water. The 
composition is then mixed with half its -weight of 
plaster of Paris, and sets firmly in J^ to J^ of an hour. 
It is of great adhesive power, not permeable to petro- 
leum, a low conductor of heat, and but superficially at- 
tacked by hot water. 

For Lute, or cement for closing joints of appa- 
ratus, mix Paris plaster with water to a soft paste, and 
apply it at once. It bears nearly a red heat. To ren- 
der it impervious, rub it over with wax and oil. 



281 

Roman Cement. — Slaked lime, i bush.; green cop- 
peras, 2>% lbs. ; fine gravel sand, % bush. Dissolve 
the copperas in hot water, and mix all together to the 
proper consistency for use ; use the day it is mixed 
and keep stirring it with a stick while in use. 

ViCAT's Hydraui^ic Cement is prepared by stir- 
ring into water a mixture of 4 parts chalk and i part 
clay ; mix with a vertical wheel in a circular trough, 
letting it run out in a large receiver. A deposit soon 
takes place which is formed into small bricks, which 
after being dried in the sun, are moderately calcined. 
It enlarges about f when mixed with water. 

Glue to Resist Moisture. —Glue, 5 parts; resin, 
4 parts; red ochre, 2 parts; mix with the smallest pos- 
sible quantity of water. 

Cement to Fasten Leather on Top Rollers. 
— Gum Arabic, 2^ ozs.; isinglass 2% ozs. ; dissolve 
each separately in water and mix. 

Parchment Glue. — Parchment shavings, i lb ; 
water, 6 qts. Boil till dissolved, strain and evaporate 
to right consistence. 

To Attach Glass or Metal Letters to Plate 
Glass. — Copal varnish, 15 parts; drying oil, 5 parts; 
turpentine, 3 parts ; oil of turpentine, 2 parts ; lique- 
fied glue, 5 parts. Melt in a water bath and add 10 
parts of slaked lime. 

Turners' Cement. — Beeswax, i oz.; resin, % oz.; 
pitch, % oz. ; melt, and stir in fine brickdust. 

Bank Note Glue. — Dissolve i lb. of fine glue or 
gelatine in water; evaporate it till most of the water 
is expelled ; add ]4 lb. of brown sugar, and pour it 
into moulds. 

Cement for Electrical Machines and Gal- 
vanic Troughs. — Melt together 5 lbs. of resin and i 
lb. of beeswax, and stir in i lb. of red ochre (highly 
dried and still warm) and 4 oz. of plaster of Paris, 
continuing the heat a little above 212°, and stitrvoL^ 



232 N 

constantly till all frothing ceases, or (^for troughs) 
rosin, 6 lbs. ; dried red ochre, i lb. ; calcined plaster of 
Paris, j^ lb. ; linseed oil, ^ lb. 

Architectural Cement — i. Reduce paper to a 
smooth paste by boiling it in water; then add an equal 
weight of sifted v/hiting and good size ; boil to a prop- 
er consistence. 2. Paper paste and size, equal parts; 
finely powdered plaster of Paris to make it of a proper 
consistence. Use it as soon as mixed. Can be used 
in making architectural busts, statues, columns, etc. 
It is light, receives a good polish, but will not stand 
water. 

Alabaster Cement — i. Finely powdered plaster 
of Paris, made into a paste with water. 2. Melt yellow 
rosin, or equal parts yellow rosin and beeswax, then 
stir in half as much finely powdered plaster of Paris. 
The first is used to join and fit together pieces of ala- 
baster or marble, or to mend broken plaster figures. 
The second is to join alabaster, marble, and other 
similar substances that will bear being heated. 

French Cement for Rooms. — A coat of oxide cJf 
zinc, mixed with size, made up like a wash, is first laid 
on the wall, ceiling, or wainscot, and over that a coat 
of chloride of zinc applied, prepared in the same way 
as the first wash. The oxide and chloride efiect an 
immediate combination, and form a kind of cement, 
smooth and polished as glass, and said to be superior 
to plaster of Paris for coating the walls of rooms. 

Cement* for Cloth or IvEATher. — ^Take ale, i 
pt. ; best Russia isinglass, 2 ozs. ; put them into a 
common glue kettle and boil until the isinglass is dis- 
solved ; then add 4 ozs. of the best common glue, and 
dissolve it with the other ; then slowly add i ^ ozs. of 
boiled linseed oil, stirring all the time while adding, 
and until well mixed. When cold it appears like In- 
dia rubber. To use, dissolve what you need in a suit- 
able quantity of ale to have the consistence of thick 



233 

glue. It is applicable for earthenware, china, glass, or 
leather ; for harness, belts for machinery, cloth belts 
for cracker machines for bakers, etc. If for leather, 
shave off as if for sewing, apply the cement with a 
brush while hot, laying a weight to keep the joint 
firmly pressed for 6 to lo hours, or over night. 

Cutlers' Ckment. — Black rosin, 4 lbs. ; beeswax, 
I lb. ; melt together and add i lb. finely powdered and 
dried brickdust. Used for fastening knives and forks 
in their handles when they become loosened by use. 

Cement for Fastening Fibrous Materials to 
Metals. — This can be effected by dissolving glue in 
vinegar by heat and adding one-third of its volume of 
white pine pitch, also hot. 

Good Paste that will Keep a Year. — Dis- 
solve a teaspoonful of alum in a quart of warm water. 
When cold, stir in as much flour as will bring it to the 
consistence of cream, being particular to break up all 
the lumps ; next, place it on the fire and allow it to 
cook gently for a few minutes, stirring well mean- 
while ; add 2 teaspoonfuls of corrosive sublimate, a 
few drops of carbolic acid, and a teaspoonful of oil of 
rosemary, or cloves, or lavender, or any oth^r essen- 
tial oil, stirring in well. This paste will keep for any 
length of time in prime condition. 

Mucilage. — Put 3 ozs. of gum arabic in an earth- 
en-ware vessel containing J^ pt. of cold water. If the 
liquid is occasionally stirred, the gum in 24 hours will 
be dissolved and ready for use. 

Cement to Fasten Rubber to Wood or Metal. 
— Soak pulverized gum shellac in 10 times its weight 
of ammonia ; in 3 or 4 weeks a slimy mass is obtained 
which will become liquid without the use of hot water ; 
this softens the rubber, and becomes, after volatiliza- 
tion of the ammonia, hard and impermeable to gases 
and fluids whenever it is used on rubber connected to 
wood or metal, as in steam, or other apparat\i*s. 



284 

IMPERISHABI.B Putty. — I^inseed oil, 7 lbs. ; brown 
umber, 4 lbs. ; boil together two hours ; stir in 2 oz. 
beeswax, remove from the fire, and mix in 5^^ lbs. 
chalk and 1 1 lbs. white lead, mixing thoroughly. 

Chbap G01.D Varnish for Ornamentai, Tin- 
Ware. — Turpentine varnish, 2 gals.; turpentine, i 
gal. ; asphaltum, i gill ; umber, 8 oz. ; yellow aniline, 
4 oz. ; gamboge, i lb. Boil and mix for 10 hours. 

SoldeAs, 32 KINDS. — I. Plumbers' Solder. — I^ead, 2 
parts; tin, i part. 2. TinmerCs Solder, — Lead, i part; 
tin, I part. Zinc Solder, — Tin, i part ; lead, i to 2 
parts. 4. Pewter Solder, — I^ead, i part; bismuth, i 
to 2 parts. 5. Spelter Solder, — Equal parts copper and 
zinc. 6. Pewterers' soft Solder, — Bismuth, 2 ; lead, 4; 
tin, 3 parts. 7. Another, — Bismuth, i ; lead, i ; tin, 2 
parts. 8. Another pewter Solder, — Tin, 2 parts ; lead, 
I part. 9. — Glazier's Solder, — Tin, 3 parts ; lead, i 
part. 10. Solder for Copper, — Copper, 10 parts ; zinc, 
9 parts. II. Yellow Solder Jor Brass or Copper, — Cop- 
per, 32 lbs. ; zinc, 29 lbs. ; tin, i lb. 12. Bra^s Solder, 
— Copper, 61.25 parts; zinc, 38.75 parts. 13. Bra^s 
Solder Yellow and easily Jusible, — Copper 45 ; zinc, 55 
parts. 14. Brass Solder y white, — Copper, 57.41 parts; 
tin, 14.60 parts ; zinc, 27.99 parts. 15. Another Solder 
for Copper, — Tin, 2 parts ; lead, i part. When the 
copper is thick, heat it by a naked fire ; if thin, use a 
tinned copper tool. Use muriate or chloride of zinc, 
as a flux. The same solder will be for irony cast-iron 
or steel; if the pieces are thick, heat by a naked fire, 
or immerse in the solder. 16. Blaxk Solder, — Copper, 
2; zinc, 3; tin, 2 parts. 17. Another, — Sheet brass, 
20 lbs. ; tin, 6 lbs.; zinc, i lb. 18. Cold Brazing with- 
out Fire or Lamp. — Fluoric acid, i oz. ; oxy muriatic 
acid, I oz. ; mix in a lead bottle. Put a chalk mark 
each side where you want to braze. This mixture will 
keep about six months in one bottle. 19. Cold Solder- 
ing without Fire or Lamp, — Bismuth, % oz. ; quick- 



235 

silver, % oz.; block tin filings, i oz.; spirits salts, i 
oz. ; all mixed together. 20. To Solder Iron to Steel 
or either to Brass, — ^Tin, 3 parts; copper, 39^ parts; 
zinc, 7^ parts. When applied in a molten state it 
will firmly unite metals first named to each other. 
21. Plumbers' Solder. — Bismuth, i ; lead, 5; tin, 3 parts; 
is a first class composition. 22. White Solder for raised 
Britannia Ware, — Tin, 100 lbs.; hardening, 8 lbs.; anti- 
mony, 8 lbs. 23. Hardening for Britannia,— {^o be 
mixed separately from the other ingredients). Copper, 
2 lbs, ; tin, i lb. 24. Best soft Solder for cas^t Britannia 
Ware, — Tin, 8 lbs.; lead, 5 lbs. 25. Bismuth Solder, — 
Tin, i; lead, 3; bismuth, 3 parts. 26. Solder for 
Brass that Tvill Stand Hammering, — Brass, 78.26 parts; 
zinc, 17.41 parts; silver, 4.33 parts; add a little chloride 
of potassium to your borax for a flux. 27. Solder for 
Steel Joints, — Silver, 19 parts; copper, i part; brass, 

2 parts. Melt all together. 28. Hard Solder, Copper, 

3 parts ; zinc, i part. Melt together. 29. Solder for 
Brass. — Copper, 3 parts; zinc, i part; with borax. 

30. Solder for Copper, — Brass, 6 parts; zinc, i part; 
tin, I part ; melt all together well, and pour out to cool. 

31. Solder for Platina. — Gold with borax. ^2, Solder 
for Iron. — The best solder for iron is good tough brass 
with a little borax. 

N. B. In soldering, the surfaces to be joined are 
made perfectly clean and smooth, and then covered 
with sal ammoniac, resin or other flux, the solder is 
then applied, being melted on and smoothed over by 
a tinned soldering iron. 

Soldering Fluid. — Take 2 oz. muriatic acid; add 
zinc till bubbles cease to rise; add % teaspoonful of 
sal ammoniac. 

Black Varnish for Coal Buckets. — Asphaltum, 
I lb. ; lampblack, ^ lb. ; resin, }i lb. ; spirits of tur- 
pentine, I qt. Dissolve the asphaltum and resin in 
the turpentine, then rub up the lampblack wU.\\. Vvas^fc^ 



oil, only sufficient to form a paste, and mix with the 
others. Apply with a brush. 

SIZES OF TIN.WARE OF DIFFERENT KINDS. 

{For Diamilirs, &e., ofCirclrs sie Tabitt) . 





of bM 


of top! 


HeiK'l 






1 

■'4 


inchu 

1 

Is 
1 


Inche. 




Sf^ 




:—i \ 5;; 




1 


PJOT 


r._.-.| ji. 

6 qtfl 




' ::::::; 


PIE Pimfl 


i 


SHALL WiBH Bowl 

Mine Stiuihbh,.. 


"■.■'.V.T.". M qi». 
>" <i" 


^« 




?« 








Mbasl'rbs for DruggiBls, Beer 


IS: 

. gal. 




1 V £ 



Tin Cans - 
Gallons. 



-Size of Sheet, for from i to 100 



15 " 30tiy4S " I 

This includes all the laps, seams, etc., which will 
be found sufficiently correct for all practical purposes. 



237 

Patent I^UBRiCATiNG Oii..-^ Water, i gal.; clean 
tallow, 3 lbs.; palm oil, lo lbs.; common soda, ^ lb. 
Heat the mixture to about 210° Fahr.; stir well until 
it cools down to 70° Fahr., when it is fit for use. 

To RENDER Wood Indestructible. — Robbins' 
Process, The apparatus used consists of a retort or 
still, which can be made of any size or form, in which 
resin, coal tar, or other oleaginous substances, together 
with water, are placed in order to subject them to the 
heat. Fire being applied beneath the retort contain- 
ing the coal tar, etc., oleaginous vapor commences to 
rise, and passes out through a connecting pipe into a 
large iron tank or chamber (which can also be built 
of any size), containing the timber, etc., to be operated 
upon. The heat acts at once upon the wood, causing 
the sap to flow from every pore, which, rising in the 
form of steam, condenses on the body of the chamber, 
and discharges through an escape pipe in the lower 
part. In this process a temperature of 212° to 250° 
Fahr. is sufficient to remove the surface moisture from 
the wood ; but after this the temperature should be 
raised to 300° or more, in order to completely saturate 
and permeate the body of the wood with the antiseptic 
vapors and heavier products of the distillation. The 
hot vapor coagulates the albumen of the wood, and 
opens the pores, so that]a large portion of the oily prod- 
uct or creosote is admitted ; the contraction resulting 
from the cooling process hermetically seals them, and 
decay seems to be almost impossible. There is a man- 
hole in the retort, used to change or clean out the con- 
tents ; and the wood chamber is furnished with doors 
made perfectly tight. The whole operation is com- 
pleted in less than one hour, rendering the wood proof 
against rot, parasites, and the attacks of the Teredo 
navilis or naval worm. German Ston^ Coating for 
Wood. — Chalk, 40 parts ; resin, 50 parts ; linseed oil, 4 
parts ; melt together. To this add one part of oxide. 



of copper, afterwards i part of solphiiric acid ; add this 
last careficdly ; apply with a brush. 

ORILUMQ AMD BORING HOLES III CLASS AMD 



To DRILL Hardened Steel. — Cover your steel 
with melted beeswax, when coated and cold, make a 
hole in the wax with a fine pointed nee<fle or other 
article the size of hole you require, put a drop of strong 
nitric acid upon it, after an hour rinse off, and apply 
again ; it will gradually eat through. 

Boring a Hole with a Boring Tool. — In boring 
a hole with a boring tool, it is usually necessary to 
drill the hole first, and too much care cannot be taken 
in finishing. An iron gauge should be made first ; it 
is usually made of a piece of sheet iron or wire. The 
hole should then be drilled smaller than the size de- 
sired, and then bored to the required size, and it is im- 
possible to bore a hole perfect without taking two or 
three light chips, mere scrapings with which to finish. 
Holes, in this way, may be bored as nicely as they can 
be reamed. 

Boring Holes with Boring Arbor. — A boring 
arbor is a shaft with a set in it, for the purpose of 
boring holes of great length, and is designed to be used 
in a lathe. In doing this properly, you must first see 
if your lathe is set straight ; if not, adjust it. Having 
done this, put the piece of work to be bored in the car- 
riage of your lathe, pass your arbor through the hole 
to be bored, and put it on the centres of your lathe. 
Having done this, adjust your work true to the posi- 
tion desired by measuring from the point of the tool, 
continually turning round the arbor from side to side 
of the piece to be bored, while you are bolting it to the 
carriage, and measure until it is perfectly true. Hav- 
ing done this, bore the hole, and take for the last chip 
only a hundredth of an inch. This makes a true and 



239 

smooth hole. It is impossible to make a hole true with 
any kind of a tool when you are cutting a large chip, 
for the tool springs so that no dependence can be 
placed upon it. 

To MAKE A Boring Arbor and Tool that will 
NOT Chatter. — Boring tools, when used in small 
arbors, are always liable to chatter and make a rough 
hole. To prevent this, the tool should be turned in a 
lathe, while in its position in the arbor, upon the circle 
of the size of the hole to be bored, and the bearing 
lengthwise of the arbor, should be only as wide as the 
feed of the lathe ; for if the bearing of a tool is on 
the face, the more it will chatter. 

Writing Inscriptions on Metals. — Take % lb. 
of nitric acid and i oz. of muriatic acid. Mix, shake 
well together, and it is ready for use. Cover the place 
you wish to mark with melted beeswax ; when cold, 
write your inscription plainly in the wax clear to the 
metal with a sharp instrument ; then apply the mixed 
acids with a feather, carefully filling each letter. I^et 
it remain from i to lo minutes, according to appear- 
ance desired ; then throw on water, which stops the 
process, and remove the wax. 

Drilling Cast-iron. — Carbolic acid will increase 
cutting thirty per cent. 

Drilling Glass. — Spirits of turpentine will en- 
able a hole to be drilled in glass. Drill must be very 
hard and used with little pressure. Another way is to 
smear a coating of beeswax about one-eighth inch 
thick, remove the size of hole wanted and pour in a 
drop of melted lead. The hole will instantly drop out. 

To^Cement Brass on Glass. — For cementing 
brass on glass the following receipt is recommended 
by Puscher: "Take resin soap, made by boiling i part 
of caustic soda, 3 parts of colophonium (resin) in 5 
parts of water, and kneading into it half the quantity 
of plaster of Paris. This cement is useful for fasteQissL"^ 



240 

the brass top on glass lamps, as it is very strong, is not 
acted upon by petroleum, bears heat very well, and 
hardens in one-half or three-quarters of an hour. By 
substituting zinct white, whitelead, or air slacked lime 
for plaster of Paris, it hardens more slowly. Water at- 
tacks only the surface of this cement. 

To Count thk Revolutions of a Shaft. — Sev- 
eral rough-and-ready methods of ascertaining the num- 
ber of revolutions of a shaft are known to engineers, 
but the following one, suggested in the "Manufacturer 
and Builder,*' by M. C. Meigs, of Washington, is so 
simple, ingenious, and, when carefully conducted, so 
accurate, that we are sure its reproduction here will 
interest our mechanical readers. 

A lead pencil is tied fast to the end of the shaft 
whose revolutions are to be counted, in such a manner 
that it shall describe a circle of convenient size for ob- 
servation. If, now, a piece of paper be held lightly 
against the pencil, the motion of the pencil will de- 
scribe a circle on it. If, however, the paper be moved 
backward and forward while the contact with the pencil 
is maintained, the pencil will describe a series of loops 
intersecting each other. By timing the period of con- 
tact, and then counting the number of loops recorded 
on the paper, the number of the revolutions of the shaft 
will be given with close approximation to the truth. 

Calculating Speed of a Shaft by Cancella- 
tion .^The general rule for obtaining the speed of any 
shaft that is driven by a series of pulleys or gears from 
a shaft of known speed, is to multiply the known speed 
by the diameter of all the drivers, and divide this prod- 
uct by the product of all the diameters of the driven, 
and the quotient will be the speed of the last shaft. 
The quickest and easiest way to perform this operation 
is to "put it in the form of a long fraction, with the drivers 
for a numerator and the driven for a denominator, and 
then shorten the work by cancellation. Thus, if we 



241 

had a shaft with a speed of i8o revolutions on which 
was a 48 in. pulley driving an 18 in. pulley, and on the 
shaft with this was a 32 in. pulley driving on to a 10 
in. pulley, we would place the fraction in this form : 

180 X 48 X 32 

= i»536 Rev. 

18 X 10 
The 18 and 10 in the denominator will cancel the 
180 and leave only the product of 48x32 = 1,536. The 
slip of the belt would, in ordinary conditions, leave the 
speed 1,500 revolutions. In the case of gears it is sim- 
pler to use the number of teeth instead of the diame- 
ters. 



242 



TABLE FOR CALCULATING HOR8E-POWER OF 

ENGINES. 

It will be seen that the horse-power at any speed 
of piston can be had, while the ordinary rule is com- 
puted from a given speed and steam pressure- 

The following table of horse-power constants will 
be found convenient in figuring the power of engines 
with cylinders of from four inches in diameter to sixty 
inches in diameter for one hundred feet of piston 
speed a minute and one pound mean effective pressure. 
To figure the horse-power multiply the constant in the 
right hand column by the number of feet the piston 
travels per minute, will give the horse-power constant 
for the number of feet traveled, then multiply by the 
pounds of mean effective pressure. The quotient will 
be the indicated horse-power of the engine : 



*^ ri 


'd OS 


*s fl 


TS Oj 


"v. a 


'O ctf 


O.J5 


u 


.rH 


4; 


o.s 


a> 


u 

0) U 




u 

^ u 


4^ 


u 


0) 




!2^ 4> 


4-* dJ • 






CO V « 


Diam 
cylin 
inchc 


J3 

ill M 9 


a a^ 


2 

CO Q.S 

S2S 


S&.2 


5J 


4 , 


•038 


17 


.68475 


50 


5950 


4>^ 


.048 


18 


.77075 


52 


6.432 


5 


.06 


19 


.85650 


54 


6.94 


5>^ 


.072 


20 


•95175 


56 


7.462 


6 


.8550 


22 


1.15175 


58 


8.006 


^yi 


.10225 


24 


1.37050 


60 


8.566 


7 


.11650 


26 


1.60875 






VA 


.13350 


28 


1.86550 






8 


.152 


30 


2.142 






^yi 


.172 


32 


2.436 






9 


.19250 


34 


2.746 






lO 


.238 


36 


3.084 






II 


.288 


38 


3.436 






12 


•34150 


40 


3.808 






13 


.402 


42 


4.198 






14 


.466 


44 


4.606 






15 


.53275 


46 


5036 






16 


.609 


48 


5.482 







248 

Indicated horse-power for each pound average 
pressure on a square inch, with different diameters of 
cylinder, and one hundred feet of piston speed. 

Engine Foundations. — ^There is not a detail in 
engine construction and operation that merits greater 
consideration, or is of greater importance to the suc- 
cessful working of an engine than the foundation upon ■ 
which it stands, and too much care cannot be accorded it, 
that it shall have ample spread, stiffness, unity and 
adaptability to the movements and operation of the 
parts which it supports. It should be so bonded and 
tied that unequal settlement shall not take place, and 
the height, weight and base should be of such propor- 
tion that when the engine is in full operation there 
shall be no swaying or twisting of the parts, no heat- 
ing of the journals, no springing or tremor of the bed 
arising for an unsuccessful transmission of the strains. 
The higher the speed and revolution the stiffer and 
more solid should be the foundation, and the greater 
the base contact with the supporting earth. A good 
foundation will often decrease the defects of a poor bed, 
provided, of course, that such engine bed be properly 
and thoroughly bolted to its foundation. When prop- 
erly constructed and tied together the engine bed and 
its foundation should be portions of one complete 
whole, inseparable and undisturbed in their relation- 
ship by the movements of the engine parts while at 
their hardest work. 

A good bottom of concrete of smooth upper sur- 
face laid upon a rock or solid earth bottom, upon 
which the main structure of brick is laid close and 
jointed with first quality of cement, and the whole cap- 
ped with one or more large blocks of stone jointed and 
placed to suit the engine bed, and to distribute the 
weight over as great an area as possible, constitutes the 
best foundation. Where bricks are scarce the founda- 



244 

tion above the concrete may be all of stone, and the 
larger the stone the better. 

Ordinary rubble work is not to be relied upon, the 
only capacity for retaining and uniting the structures 
as a whole being contained in the cement. The irreg- 
ular shape of the stones forming the rubble masonry 
present, through their lack of contact with each other, 
rather a precarious and unreliable bond, and the ce- 
ment is too thinly laid to fix them permanently in their 
position, in spite of the thrust and twist of engine 
operation. It is far better to mould a complete founda- 
tion of concrete, capping it, if possible, with the thick, 
solid blocks already mentioned in connection with the 
brick foundation. The foundation completed and 
thoroughly set, the engine frame or bed may be placed 
in position and lined up, and the joints filled and 
packed with melted stdphur. 

The actual nature of the soil or bottom upon which 
the engine and foundation is to rest, whether it be wet, 
soft and elastic, whether it be dry, sandy and solid, or 
whether it be a rock bottom, to which the bed might 
be immediately fastened with a mere leveling founda- 
tion between, determines the nature, extent and scope 
of the foundation, while the size, weight and power of 
the engine determines its weight and bulk to prevent 
vibration or tremor. 

How TO Make a Pulley. — Many saw-mills are 
very inconveniently located for access to foundry or 
supply dealer ; besides, just what you want is seldom 
in stock. 

Pulleys up to thirty-six inches and over can be 
easily made of two pieces of seasoned lumber, the 
width being one-half the size of pulley, the thickness 
being the width of face wanted. Cut each to a half 
circle and with two bolts, one on each side of shaft, 
cut the center so that it will lack one inch, or about 



245 

that, of coming together, care being taken to cut cen- 
ter square and true, or pulley will not run true. Then 
turn the rim off with a good rest, and you have a good, 
well-balanced pulley, and being split can be put up 
anywhere. For pulleys over six inches face two pieces 
spiked or bolted together across the grain, and for 
heavy service from four to six bolts should be used. 
The face of pulley after being turned off true can be 
covered with leather. I have used 16x36 pulley made 
in this way. For extra heavy service, the split can be 
set with key seat in shaft and babbitt metal run in so 
as to cover bolts. This forms a key that iron would 
do no good. The metal intersecting the bolts makes 
a "grip" that's almost impossible to slip. 

For E very-day use in the Engine-room. — The 
average weight of anthracite coal is 93.5 pounds per 
cubic foot. 

Coke (loose) weighs 23 to 32 pounds per cubic foot. 

Bituminous coal weighs, per heaped bushel, loose, 
75 pounds ; one ton occupies 48 cubic feet. 

Cast-iron weighs per cubic inch, .7604 pounds ; in 
round numbers, one-fourth of a pound to the cubic 
inch. 

Cast-iron will expand and contract between the 
extreme ranges of temperature in this country with 
a force equal to 4^^ tons per square inch of surface 
exposed. 

Wrought iron expands and contracts between ex- 
treme ranges of temperature equal to nine to one per 
square inch of section. 

One gallon, U. S. standard, contains 231 cubic 
inches; weight of water in same, 8331 ; one cubic 
foot contains 7.4805 gallons of water. 

The velocity of steam, of atmospheric pressure, 
flowing into a vacuum is 1,660 feet per second; into 
air, 650 feet per second. 



246 

To find the pressure in square inches of a column 
of water, multiply the height of the column in feet 
by 434. 

The proper safe-working load for wire rope is as 
follows: One-half inch in diameter, i,ooo pounds; 
five-eighths inch, 1,500 pounds; three-fourths inch, 
3)500 pounds; one inch, 6,000 pounds. This is for 
19 wires to the strand, hemp centers. 

To find the diameter when the circumference is 
known, multiply the circumference by 3,183. 

To find the area of a triangle, multiply the base 
by one-half of the height. 

No. I wire gauge sheet-iron weighs 12^ pounds 
per square foot; No. 2 iron, 12 pounds; No. 3 iron, 11 
pounds; No. 4 iron, 10 pounds; No. 5 iron, 9 pounds; 
No. 6 iron, S}( pounds; No. 7 iron, y}4 pounds; No. 
8 iron, 7 pounds. 

To find the lap required on a slide valve to cut oflF 
steam at three-fourths stroke, multiply the stroke of 
the valve in inches by .250; the product is the. lap in 
terms of the stroke. To cut off at two-thirds stroke, 
multiply by .289, lead not considered. 

HOW TO SUCCEED IN LUMBER BUSINESS. 

Run your mill for all it is worth. Keep machinery, 
belts, etc., in order, and do not stop a minute, if possi- 
ble. " Time is money," especially when a lot of men 
are waiting for a small belt to be laced which the fore- 
man should have done the night before. 

The mill-man never succeeds who leaves his mill 
with the whistle sound, unless he has a good, trusty 
foreman. No business figures out so nice a profit as 
the lumber business ; and how many do we see suc- 
ceed. 

Discard old, womout, second-hand machinery. 
There is good second-hand machinery on the market. 



247 

but be a judge and know the reputation of those from 
whom you buy. 

Have your foreman (if yourself) at, the mill thirty 
minutes before starting up, he first seeing that there will 
be a good head of steam and plenty of water See 
that all parts of the machinery are well oiled' saws 
changed or sharpened. Have engine running at full 
speed at the sound of the whistle and all hands ready. 
A thousand feet of lumber will be cut before the 
incompetent foreman has the mill started. At noon 
the foreman's duty is to examine all belts and machin- 
ery, and repair those that show weakness. Do not 
take the chances, and probably stop one half hour, 
to say nothing of some being hurt by broken belt, it 
having wound around shaft, resulting in a damage of 
fifty dollars and a stop of a day or so to replace shaft. 
This may be to the extreme, but such cases have hap- 
pened. 

The dutiful foreman makes his regular rounds. 
His ear is familiar with the right hum, and detects 
the least defect. When mill shuts down at night that 
part is repaired, if it takes one-half the. night. This 
constitutes successful milling, and allows saw-milling 
to work to figures. 

If you have a good foreman, keep him. They 
are the scarcest of all skill. He will save his wages 
alone in the prevention of breakdowns and being equal 
to the emergency in an accident by having every- 
thing in its place and knowing where and just what 
he can substitute. [Not what he wants, as that calls 
for a machine shop order and a lay-up of the mill.] 



248 

SUPPI^EMBNT TO BAND-SAWS. 

Well knowing that fracture is the principal evil in 
the band-saw and about the only draw-back toward its 
perfection, I have made it a particular study and ex- 
perimented with diflferent shaped teeth, and I find that 
this has considerable]to do with the saw cracking. 

The very best steel should be used if a saw is made 
to last any length of time. Good steel possesses more 
carbon, which makes it tougher, so that such a saw re- 
quires but little temper above the natural steel. Com- 
mon steel is nearer like iron and has to be tempered much 
higher, which the steel will not stand, bending and 
straightening as fast as a band-saw travels. 

Band-saws require a special kind of steel. Often 
low-tempered saws of a fine quality steel soon crack. 
Since the tooth edge of a saw cracks much quicker, it 
is evident there is something wrong, and that is, the 
saw does not bend normally but bends at the extrem- 
ity of the throat of teeth. This bending in the same 
place, especially if reduced to a slim, narrow space, 
is bound to produce a crack. This is overcome by 
slightly changing the edge of emery-wheel so that this 
extremity of gullet is changed, which produces a new 
bending place, thus relieving the steel at that particu- 
lar place. Thick, heavy teeth tend to make this bend- 
ing more acute, as shown at J^ of this engraving ; also 
at^. 

Ay B and C show teeth with square corners. Only 
B produces a crack from this. A and G do not have 
the comer at the extremity ; therefore saw will not 
crack there, but as shown at the bottom of throat. D 
shows a very good tooth, which by dressing the edge 
of wheel can be changed similar to E, which changes 
the bending as indicated by the cracks. F and G are 
bad forms. H and K are good shaped teeth for 



249 



a band-saw. The bending strain is not confined to so 
short a space and is easily changed, as there is a slight 
difference between the teeth. Tooth 2 shows the bend- 
ing strain at 3 and 4. If such a shape could be con- 
veniently kept with plenty of hook, such a saw would 






last well. Some filers run almost a straight tooth. 
This wears the saw almost square across and keeps 
bending almost in the same place. Plenty of hook wears 
the tooth back, which changes that weak place. Some 



250 

Saw makers and filers contend that a saw to open in 
center will crack in center. This cannot be tinless 
in broad saws where the edges are slack. Saws crack 
from two causes. Too much tension from its strain 
and the bending over the wheels. A saw may be 
open but little and crack. This is from the tension 
being run too close to the edge. This is caused by the 
miscellaneous use of the hammer on the anvil, that is, 
removing high places and lumps near the edge. 

The opening should be confined to within one to 
one and one-half inches of the edge according to 
width of saw. Straighten on a firm wooden slab or 
block. It takes lighter blows, does not distort the 
tension nor produce sharp lumps. In straightening 
the edge, watch that the drop is right and not to near 
edge. 

Thk success of thk BiCND SAW lies prin- 
cipally in a well fitted tooth, which can not be 
studied to closely. Most saws have too many 
teeth. Fewer teeth, short and shaped as 2, will ac- 
complish better results in every way. A short tooth 
will not tremble. Teeth that tremble loose their 
corners, and cut irregular waves in lumber. 15 gauge 
saw should have teeth 1^ apart, 14 gauge i^ apart ; 
this is based on good swaying and filing. Tooth E. 
is much longer than 2, but has not the dust room. The 
shorter the tooth and straighter the throat the longer 
the saw will last. Saws should be matched closely. 
A crack at first is very short, but grows unless punched, 
which should be deeply done with a center punch on 
both sides. A crack }4 inch long amounts to but 
little if punched. It soon extends an inch and the 
life of the saw is gone. 

What good fusing WII.1. do. — Will let a saw 
run with less strain on the wheels. Does not 
require so much tension in saw. Saw will not 



251 

dodge at the head of the cut, nor " snake " around 
a knot or tough place. Will stand more feed without 
shoving back on wheels. All this adds to the life of 
the saw. 

Poor fiung. — Saw will snake, necessitating more 
strain and tension, which will crack it. Will slip on the 
wheels and will heat. 

Give saw plenty of set; a band saw cannot run 
with limited set. Saw will drive back by being 
clamped as it passes through the cut, having the mo- 
tion of the carriage acting against it. 

CrackKd saws. — By examining a crack it will show 
to have begun at the extremity of the gullet which is the 
point of the bending and strain of the cut. Tooth 2 shows 
the strain distributed at 3 and 4, which will be more neu- 
tral if slightly full as shown. A straight space will be 
slightly weaker as at H, which by no means is a bad 
tooth. Close teeth cannot be cut out as 2. They should 
be i^ inches apart and more on a 14 gauge saw. 
Owing to emery wheel passing quickly over throat of 
teeth, extra precaution should be used. Use only the 
best wheels. ' 

Facts worthy of notice about making a good 
BRAZE. — Be sure that saw is no thicker at laps, or braze 
will soon give away. Have saw clamped and irons 
hot (to a good cherry red), apply acid between laps, 
leaving the upper lap so as to spring up and down a 
little. Apply solder and dilute again with acid that 
the laps and solder be well covered. Apply irons 
quickly, clamp instantly and you will have a good braze. 
Both laps and solder must be absolutely clean, not a 
touch of the finger. Use charcoal for heating irons, 
which must be a trifle wider than the lap and square 
to hold suflficient heat. All solder is not alike and a 
good quality is often hard to get. Some will melt at 
a cherry while another may require a bright cherry « 



252 

Some solder will not adhere if irons are only a trifle too 
hot. Good quality will stand more heat and will not 
go to dross. I mention this because I had trouble 
with different grades of solder. 

I mention the precaution from the fact that the 
instructions laid down by sawmakers helps a filer but 
little in this delicate work 

J. H. Miner. 



263 

CONTENTS. 

Part I. 

Page. 

Hammering circular saws 6 

Hammering bench 7 

A saw dished from the log 8 

Laying oif a saw 9 

Position of a dished saw 10 

Taking out a blue spot 11 

A twisted saw being too slack on rim ,. 14-15 

Part II. 

Tensioning circular saws 16 

A stiflfsaw 17 

A dished saw too open for speed 18-20 

Tensioning a saw to suit the average mill 20-22 

Where to open a saw 22 

A twisted saw (unequal tension) ". 23 

Changing a saw from right to left hand 25 

Part III. 

High speed and fast feed saws 26 

Improved tensioning bench 27 

Table of speed of saws 28 

Tensioning and correcting unequal tension 29 

Locating unequal tension 30-34 

A tight and loose place 34-35 

Gauging unequal tension 36 

Action of centrifugal force 37 

The drop from straight edge 88 

Broken saws and what breaks them 39-44 

Unequal tension." A deceiving saw 44-45 

Unequal tension. A twisted saw 45-47 

Band log saws ^ 47-51 

Filing and swaging 51 

Shape of teeth (See supplement) 52 

Filing and setting 54-57 

Hammering band saws 57 



264 

PAGB. 

Tension — the drop from the straight edge 58-60 

Hammering the edges straight 61 

Straightening 62-65 

Fractured saws, unequal tension (see supplement) 65-67 

Brazing band saws 67-68 

Speed of handsaws 69-70 

Carriage and track 70 

The latest authority on the fracture of band saws, 

shape of teeth, hammering, etc., will be 

found in supplement. 

Part I. 

Circular saws adapted to mills of small capacity, 

filing, swagingand gumming 70-72 

Right shaped tooth for hard and soft wood 72-76 

Part II. 

Teeth suited for mills of medium capacity 76-77 

Part III. 

Teeth for modern mills of largest capacity 78-79 

Swaging saws. Improper use of the swage 80-81 

Various shaped throats 82 

Inserted teeth saws 83 

Their advantage over the solid :.... 84-86 

Shingle saws 86-87 

Hammering 87-88 

Tensioning 88 

Hammering the collars 89 

Filing and gumming 89 

Various shapes of teeth 90 

Lining shingle saws 91 

Thin saws — a great saving demonstrated 92-94 

Filing and setting with right shape tooth 94 

Cutoif saws 94-96 

Broke cut oif saws 96-97 

Drag saws 97 

Small rip and variety saws 97-98 

Straightening and tensioning 98 

Proper shape of teeth 99-100 



265 

Page. 

Saws heating on rim 100 

Saws heatingin center ; 101 

Lining Saw 101-102 

Truing a saw on mandrel 102-103 

Turning up saw collars 103-104 

Care of saw mandrel 104-105 

A hot mandrel 105-106 

MILL BUILDING. 

Small and portable mills 107-109 

Mills of medium capacity 109-111 

Modern mills 111-114 

Sawing logs to best advantage .:.. 115 

Sowing crooked logs so as to make straight lum- 
ber 117-119 

Quarter sawing 119-121 

Quarter sawing flooring 121-122 

Piling lumber to prevent warping 122-123 

Grading and classifying all kinds of lumber 

for market 124-133 

Slipshod methods of manufacturing lumber 133-134 

Care of hard wood lumber 135-143 

Warpage and shrinkage of lumber 143-144 

When to cut valuable timber 144 

Dry-rot in timber 144-146 

Seasoning and weight of woods 146-147 

How to be a successful sawyer 147-151 

Calculating a log for sawing 151-152 

Short method of calculating lumber by can- 
celation 153-155 

How to successfully run a planer 155-158 

What causes wavy work 158 

Speed and feed 159 

Matching 159-160 

Setting knives 160 

Babbitting cylinder 160-161 

Building a planing-mill, how to arrange 161-163 

Log tables, various rules 164-166 



256 

PAGE. 

Table board measure 167 

Care of belting 167-168 

Selecting 168-169 

Belt fasteners and lacing 169-172 

Notes on belting 172-176 

Horse-power of belting 176-177 

Length of, and weight of belting. 177 

Notes on shafting 177 

Table of transmission 178-179 

Pulleys 180 

Circumference of circles 181-182 

Strength and tension of iron 183 

Weight and strength of chains 183-184 

Transmission of power by wire rope 185 

Strength of ropes 186 

Practical considerations on belts and pulleys 186-188 

Precaution to Engineers and Firemen 188-190 

Hints to Engineers 191-193 

Rules adopted by The Hartford Steam Boiler In- 
spection and Insurance Company 194-197 

Testing steam boilers 197 

Scale and corrosion 197-199 

Setting up pumps 199-200 

Getting up steam on boilers. Precaution 200-205 

Preventing boiler scale 205-207 

Form and strength of boilers 207-212 

Things that must not be done 212-213 

Weight of wrought-iron 214 

Quality of iron and steel 214-215 

Tempering steel 216 

Table of horse-power of boilers 217 

Value of different woods for fuel 218 

For every-day reference, receipts, etc 218-223 

Practical receipts for Machinists and Mill men, 

solders, cements, glue, etc. of all kinds 223 

To render wood indestructable 237 

Drilling and boring holes in glass and metal 238-240 



207 



PAGE. 

Counting the speed of a shaft 240 

Speed of shaft by cancelation 240-241 

Table of horse-power of engines 242 

Engine foundations 243-245 

For every-day use in the engine room 245-246 

How to suceed in the lumber business 246-247 

Supplement to band-saws, cracked saws, good and 

bad filing, brazing, etc 248